’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value- conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble- free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS:
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll- free:1- 800- 331- 4331

Hawaii:
Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll- free:1- 888- 272- 5515
CANADIAN OWNERS:
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll- free:1- 888- TOYOTA- 8 or 1- 888- 869- 6828
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.

The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com

Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com

Canada www.toyota.ca

 2005 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.

2005 4RUNNER from Apr. ’05 Prod. (OM35860U) i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-
age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause

injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in
order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
others.
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
NOTICE “Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

ii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help
reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the
Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to event of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-
read Section 1- 3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the
terms of helping you understand how you can receive the event of collision. However, the more you know about
maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this these systems and how to use them properly, the greater
vehicle provides, Section 1- 3 of this Owner’s Manual is your chances become of surviving an accident without
the most important Section for you and your family to death or serious injury.
read. Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of
Section 1- 3 describes the function and operation concern- the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear
ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys- seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be
tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for
should be aware of. These systems work together along their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,
occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes
each system is enhanced when it is used properly and for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing
together with other systems. No single occupant restraint the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of
system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.
equal level of restraint which these systems can provide
when used together. That is why it is important for you and
your family to understand the purpose and proper use of
each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

iii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with Event data recorder
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-
bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-
of serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in
or if an object or some part of his or her body has been driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-
placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time of sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a
deployment. This is just one example of how the instruc- system to record data in a crash or a near car crash
tions in Section 1- 3 of this Owner’s Manual will help en- event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
sure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
increase the safety they can provide to you and your fami-
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record
ly in the event of an accident.
some or all of the following information:
Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section

Engine speed
1- 3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time

Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
of ownership of this vehicle.

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

Position of the transmission selector lever

Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat
belts or not

Driver’s seat position

Front passenger’s occupant classification

iv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SRS airbag deployment data The information above is intended to be used for the

SRS airbag system diagnostic data purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound
(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con- data such as conversation between passengers.
tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a
which include activating the VSC under which the VSC third party except when:
EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-
record some or all of the following information: ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

Behavior of the vehicle
Officially requested by the police or other authorities

Steering wheel angle
Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

Vehicle speed
Ordered by the court

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed However, if necessary Toyota will:

To what extent the brake pedal was applied
Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety

To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of performance
the 4 wheels
Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-

Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,
and only when it is deemed necessary

Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-
cation information to a non- Toyota organization for
research purposes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

New vehicle warranty Important health and safety

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
information about your Toyota
warranties:

New vehicle warranty CAUTION

Emission control systems warranty

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

Others ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s nents contain or emit chemicals known to the
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual State of California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
Supplement”.
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as
well as waste produced by component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
Your responsibility for other reproductive harm.
maintenance
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci- hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-
formation, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

vi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Accessories, spare parts and Spark ignition system of your

modification of your Toyota Toyota
A wide variety of non- genuine spare parts and accessories The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. ments of the Canadian Interference- Causing Equipment
You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod- Standard.
ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or
adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non- genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non- genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-
tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the
modification may not be covered under warranty.

vii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Installation of a mobile
Tire pressure warning system

Cruise control system
two- way radio system

Anti- lock brake system
As the installation of a mobile two- way radio system in
Electronic throttle control system
your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol-
lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau-
tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa-
tion. Tires and loading on your

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel Toyota
injection system

SRS airbag system Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of

Seat belt pretensioner system
steering ability and braking ability, leading to an

Traction control system (two- wheel drive models) accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-

Active traction control system cally and be sure to keep the load limits given in
(four- wheel drive models) this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation

“AUTO LSD” system (two- wheel drive models) pressure and load limits, see pages 381 and 304.

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system
(four- wheel drive models)

Hill- start assist control system

Rear height control air suspension

viii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Scrapping of your Toyota On- pavement and off- road

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
driving tips
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve-
scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they
hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
are, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to
types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver
have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-
differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is
sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service
designed for off- road use also. In addition, this vehicle
shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your
has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than
vehicle.
that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea-
ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol-
lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death
or serious injury. Be sure to read “Off- road vehicle precau-
tions” on page 282 in Section 2 and “Off- road driving pre-
cautions” on page 313 in Section 3.

ix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-
neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It
does not indicate a malfunction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 1
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Instrument panel overview

1. Side vents
2. Side defroster outlets
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Personal lights
6. Electric moon roof switch
7. Garage door opener
8. Auxiliary boxes
9. Glove box
10. Automatic transmission selector lever
11. Power door lock switches
12. Power window switches
13. Seat heater switches
14. “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch
15. Rear vents
16. Trash holder
17. Height select switch
18. “DAC” switch
19. Front cup holders
20. Tilt steering lock release lever

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

21. Telescopic steering lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal
23. Window lock switch
24. Power rear view mirror control switches

Rear console box

1. Power outlet (12 VDC)

2. Power outlet (115 VAC)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1. Instrument panel light control dial

2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
3. Audio remote control switches
4. Wiper and washer switches
5. Power back window switch
6. Audio system/rear view monitor system
and navigation system including audio
system (For the navigation system, see
the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
8. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent
system indicator light
9. Front passenger occupant classification
indicator light
10. Multi- information display
11. Emergency flasher switch
12. Air conditioning controls
13. Auxiliary box
14. Back window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
15. Four- wheel drive control switch knob
(full- time four- wheel drive models) or
multi- mode control switch knob
(multi- mode four- wheel drive models)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

16. Ignition switch

17. Cruise control switch
18. Hood lock release lever
19. Fuel filler door opener
20. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch
21. “AUTO LSD” switch
22. Center differential lock switch
23. Power outlet main switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Instrument cluster overview

1. Trip meter reset button 4. Speedometer 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Tachometer 5. Fuel gauge 8. Odometer and two trip meters
3. Service reminder indicators and 6. Low fuel level warning light 9. Odometer/two trip meter changeover
indicator lights button

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1
Vehicle stability control system warning

light∗1

Traction control system warning light∗1
Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1 (two- wheel drive models)

Active traction control system warning light∗1
(four- wheel drive models)
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

“AUTO LSD” system warning light∗1
(two- wheel drive models)
Discharge warning light∗1
Downhill assist control system warning
light∗1 (four- wheel drive models)

Hill- start assist control system warning
Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1 light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1 Open door warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

SRS warning light∗1
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

warning light∗1 (four- wheel drive models)
or Anti- lock brake system warning light∗1
Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Low windshield washer fluid level warning Automatic transmission indicator lights
light∗1 (for vehicles sold in Canada)

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system Low speed four- wheel drive indicator light∗3
indicator light (four- wheel drive models)

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off Center differential lock indicator light∗3
indicator light∗2 (four- wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light

(four- wheel drive models)
Front passenger occupant classification indicator
light
Four- wheel drive indicator light∗3
(multi- mode four- wheel drive models)

Headlight low beam indicator light Slip indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

Tail light indicator light
(two- wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light
(four- wheel drive models)

Turn signal indicator lights Height control indicator lights

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Height control “OFF” indicator light∗4

Cruise control indicator light∗5

∗1 : For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 145 in Section 1- 6.
∗2 : For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” on page 94 in Section 1- 3.
∗3 : If this light flashes, see “Four- wheel drive system” on page
162 in Section 1- 7.
∗4 : If this light flashes, see “Rear height control air suspension”
on page 182 in Section 1- 7.
∗5 : If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 193 in
Section 1- 7.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 2
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Keys
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked with-
out a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

Your vehicle is supplied with the two

NOTICE
kinds of keys.
1. Master keys (black)—These keys work When using a key containing a trans-
in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will ponder chip, observe the following
need one of them to make a new key precautions:
with a built- in transponder chip.
When starting the engine, do not
2. Sub key (gray)—This key does not use the key with a key ring resting
work in the glove box. on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
Otherwise the engine may not start,
system has been placed in the head of
or may stop soon after it starts.
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Do not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-
ic waves.

Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.

Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under direct sunlight.

Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

Do not use the key with electromag-
netic materials.

When starting the engine, do not
Do not bend the key grip.
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of oth-
er vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after remov-
ing other transponder keys (includ-
ing keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Engine immobilizer system

KEY NUMBER PLATE The engine immobilizer system is a The system is automatically set when the
Your key number is shown on the plate. theft prevention system. When you in- key is removed from the ignition switch.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as sert the key in the ignition switch, the The indicator light will start flashing to
your wallet, not in the vehicle. transponder chip in the key’s head show the system is set.
transmits an electronic code to the ve- If any of the following indicator conditions
If you should lose your keys or if you hicle. The engine will start only when
need additional keys, duplicates can be occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.
the electronic code in the chip corre-
made by a Toyota dealer using the key sponds to the registered ID code for
The indicator light stays on except
number. the vehicle. when the theft deterrent system is set-
We recommend writing down the key num- ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
ber and storing it in a safe place. system” on page 35 in this Section.)

The indicator light does not start flash-
ing when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.

The indicator light flashes inconsistent-
ly.

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Wireless remote control—

Inserting the registered key in the ignition For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The This device complies with Part 15 of the
indicator light will go off. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
For your Toyota dealer to make you a following two conditions:
new key with built- in transponder chip, (1) this device may not cause harmful
your dealer will need your key number interference, and (2) this device must
and master key. However, there is a limit accept any interference received, includ-
to the number of additional keys your ing interference that may cause unde-
Toyota dealer can make for you. sired operation.
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the sys-
tem or start the engine. CAUTION
1. “LOCK” switch
NOTICE Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon- 2. “UNLOCK” switch
Do not modify, remove or disas- sible for compliance could void the 3. Back window open switch
semble the engine immobilizer sys- user’s authority to operate the equip-
tem. If any unauthorized changes or ment. 4. “PANIC” switch
modifications are made, proper opera-
tion of the system cannot be guaran-
teed. For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS- 210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Locking and unlocking

doors
The wireless remote control system is If the wireless remote control transmitter
designed to lock or unlock all the side does not actuate the doors, back window
doors and back door, open the back or alarm, operate from a normal distance:
window or activate the “PANIC” mode
Check for closeness to a radio trans-
from a distance within approximately 1 mitter such as a radio station or an
m (3 ft.) of the vehicle. airport which can interfere with normal
When you operate any switch, push it operation of the transmitter.
slowly and securely.
The battery may have been consumed.
The wireless remote control transmitter is Check the battery in the transmitter. To
an electronic component. Observe the fol- replace the battery, see following
lowing instructions in order not to cause “—Replacing battery” on page 20.
damage to the transmitter. If you lose your transmitter, contact your

Do not leave the transmitter in places Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
Locking operation
where the temperature becomes high avoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-
such as on the dashboard. dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-

Do not disassemble it. mote control transmitter” on page 351 in
Section 4.)

Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-
trol transmitters for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.

Unlocking operation

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

To lock and unlock all the side doors This double switch operation to unlock all The following adjustments can be made in
and back door, push the switches of the side doors and back door can be this system. For details, contact your
the transmitter slowly and securely. changed to a single switch operation. For Toyota dealer.
To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the details, contact your Toyota dealer.
Cancelling the wireless door locking or
side doors and back door are locked si- When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed, unlocking function
multaneously. At this time one beep will the interior light, luggage compartment
Cancelling the flash of the turn signal
be heard, and the turn signal lights flash light, ignition switch light and running lights
once. board lights (on some models) will come
on and remain on for about 15 seconds
Changing the volume of beep sound
Check to see that all the side doors and
back door are securely locked. before fading out. (For details, see “Interi-
or light” on page 134, “Luggage compart-
If any of the side doors or the back door ment light” on page 135, “Ignition switch
is not securely closed, locking cannot be light” on page 136 and “Running board
performed by the “LOCK” switch and a lights” on page 137 in Section 1- 5.)
beep will sound continuously for 10 sec-
onds. However, if the key is in the ignition You have 30 seconds to open a door after
switch, a beep will not sound. using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
To stop the buzzer, close all the side side doors and back door will be automati-
doors and back door securely or push the cally locked again.
“UNLOCK” switch.
The timing for the automatic door lock
The buzzer can be disabled. For details, function can be changed. For details, con-
contact your Toyota dealer. tact your Toyota dealer.
To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept
once to unlock the driver’s door alone. pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds tion is not repeated. Release the switch
unlocks all the side doors and back door and then push again.
simultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”
switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,
and the turn signal lights flash twice.

17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Opening back window —Activating panic mode

The “PANIC” mode does not work when
the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
This alarm function can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

To open the back window, push the Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the
back window open switch of the trans- horn intermittently and flashes the
mitter for about 1 second. The window headlights, tail lights and turn signal
will fully open. lights, and turns on the interior and
At this time, you can hear a beep. luggage compartment lights.

If the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-
tion, the back window cannot be opened hicle theft when you witness anyone at-
by the back window open switch. tempting to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To open the back window with the key,
see “Power back window” on page 30 in The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
this Section. alarm midway, push any of the switch on
the wireless remote control transmitter.
The back window opening program by You can also stop the alarm by turning
wireless remote control can be changed or the ignition key from the “LOCK” to “ON”
disabled. For details, contact your Toyota position.
dealer.

18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

NOTICE:
Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
This device complies with Part 15 of the This equipment has been tested and tenna.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the found to comply with the limits for a
Increase the separation between the
following two conditions: Class B digital device, pursuant to Part equipment and receiver.
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
(1) This device may not cause harmful designed to provide reasonable protec-
Connect the equipment into an outlet
interference, and (2) this device must tion against harmful interference in a on a circuit different from that to
accept any interference received, includ- residential installation. This equipment which the receiver is connected.
ing interference that may cause unde- generates, uses and can radiate radio
Consult the dealer or an experienced
sired operation. frequency energy and, if not installed radio / TV technician for help.
and used in accordance with the instruc- FCC WARNING:
tions, may cause harmful interference to Changes or modifications not ex-
radio communications. However, there is pressly approved by the party respon-
no guarantee that interference will not sible for compliance could void the
occur in a particular installation. If this user’s authority to operate the equip-
equipment does cause harmful interfer- ment.
ence to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is en-
couraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one or more of the following
measures:

19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Replacing battery
For vehicles sold in Canada For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: CAUTION
(1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept Special care should be taken to pre-
any interference, including interference vent small children from swallowing
that may cause undesired operation of the removed transmitter battery or
the device. components.

NOTICE

When replacing the transmitter bat-
tery, be careful not to lose the com- 1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
ponents. transmitter case.

Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-

ing these procedures:

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Be careful not to bend the electrode

when inserting the transmitter bat-
tery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.

Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

transmitter operates properly. If the trans-
mitter still does not operate properly, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat- 3. Put in a new transmitter battery with
tery by ballpoint pen. positive (+) side up.
Insert the tip of ballpoint pen at the Close the transmitter case securely.
guide groove and lift as shown in the
above illustration. NOTICE

NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and

negative side of the transmitter bat-
Do not bend the terminals. tery are faced correctly.

Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.

Do not touch or move any compo-
nents inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Side doors—
When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked with a key, the interior
light, luggage compartment light, ignition
switch light and running board lights (on
some models) will come on and remain on
for about 15 seconds before fading out.
(For details, see “Interior light” on page
134, “Luggage compartment light” on page
135, “Ignition switch light” on page 136
and “Running board lights” on page 137
in Section 1- 5.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn INSIDE LOCK KNOB
it. Move the lock knob.
To lock: Turn the key forward. To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward. To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
All the side doors and back door lock and The front doors can be opened by pulling
unlock simultaneously with the driver’s the inside handles even if the lock knobs
door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the are in the locked position.
key once will unlock the driver’s door and
twice in succession will unlock all the side
doors and back door simultaneously.
This double key turning operation to un-
lock all the side doors and back door can
be changed to a single key turning opera-
tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-
er.

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

CAUTION POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Driver’s side
Push the switch.
Do not pull the inside handle of the
front doors while driving. The doors To lock: Push the switch down on the
will open and an accident may occur. front side.
Toyota strongly recommends that all To unlock: Push the switch down on the
children be placed in the rear seat of rear side.
the vehicle. Operating the switch simultaneously locks
or unlocks all the side doors and back
Closing the door with the lock knob in the door.
lock position will also lock the door. Be If you do either of the following, no side
careful not to lock your keys in the ve- door or back door can be unlocked with
hicle. the power door lock switch.
The front doors cannot be locked if you
Lock all the side doors and back door
leave the key in the ignition switch. with the key or wireless remote control
Front passenger’s side
transmitter when all the side doors and
back door are closed.

Open the driver’s door or front passen-
ger’s door and move the inside lock
knobs of both front doors to the lock
position, then close the front doors.

23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The power door lock switch can be reset

in the following ways. CAUTION

Turn the ignition key to “ON”. Before driving, be sure that the doors

Unlock all the side doors and back are closed and locked, especially
door with the key or wireless remote when small children are in the ve-
control transmitter. hicle. Along with the proper use of

Unlock the driver’s door or front pas- seat belts, locking the doors helps
senger’s door with the inside lock prevent the driver and passengers
knob, and then unlock all the side from being thrown out from the ve-
doors and back door with the power hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-
door lock switch. vent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
This unlocking protection with the power
door lock switch can be disabled. For de-
tails, contact your Toyota dealer. REAR DOOR CHILD- PROTECTORS
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child- protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Automatic door locking and

unlocking functions
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING To select the locking linked with the To select the locking linked with the
You can select the following functions: shift position: vehicle speed:

Locking linked with the shift position 1. Close all doors and turn the ignition 1. Close all doors and turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position. switch to the “ON” position.
All doors are automatically locked when
the selector lever is moved out of “P” 2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi- 2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the
position. This function is the default tion. “N” position.
setting for new vehicles. 3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni- 3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

Locking linked with vehicle speed tion switch to the “ON” position, press tion switch to the “ON” position, press
and hold the driver’s side power door and hold the driver’s side power door
All doors are automatically locked when lock switch in the lock position for 5 lock switch in the lock position for 5
the vehicle speed goes above about 20 seconds and then release. seconds and then release.
km/h (12 mph).
The doors will be locked and unlocked The doors will be locked and unlocked
You can set or cancel the automatic to indicate that the function is set. to indicate that the function is set.
door locking functions:
To cancel the function, do the above op- To cancel the function, do the above op-
Be sure to apply the parking brake when eration again. eration again.
performing the following operations.

25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING To select the unlocking linked with the To select the unlocking linked with the
You can select the following functions: ignition switch: shift position:

Unlocking linked with the ignition 1. Close all doors and turn the ignition 1. Close all doors and turn the ignition
switch switch to the “ON” position. switch to the “ON” position.
All doors are automatically unlocked 2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the 2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
when the driver’s door is opened within “N” position. tion.
10 seconds after the ignition switch is 3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni- 3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-
turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- tion switch to the “ON” position, press tion switch to the “ON” position, press
tion, or the key is removed. and hold the driver’s side power door and hold the driver’s side power door

Unlocking linked with the shift posi- lock switch in the unlock position for lock switch in the unlock position for
tion 5 seconds and then release. 5 seconds and then release.

All doors are automatically unlocked The doors will be locked and unlocked The doors will be locked and unlocked
when the selector lever is moved to to indicate that the function is set. to indicate that the function is set.
“P” position. This function is the default To cancel the function, do the above op- To cancel the function, do the above op-
setting for new vehicles. eration again. eration again.
You can set or cancel the automatic
door unlocking functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when
performing the following operations.

26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Power windows
OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW
Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

The windows can be operated with the Automatic operation: Push the switch
switch on each side door. completely down or pull it completely up,
The power windows work when the ignition and then release it. The window will fully
switch is in the “ON” position. open or close. To stop the window part-
way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-
Key off operation: If both front doors are site direction and then release it.
closed, all the power windows work for 43
seconds even after the ignition switch is Jam protection function: During automat-
turned off. It stops working when either ic closing operation or key off closing op-
front door is opened. eration, the window stops and opens half
way if something gets caught between the
The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switch window and window frame.
tells you the switch can be operated.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the power window may not operate
automatically and the jam protection func- Window
lock
tion will not function correctly after you switch
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.
In any of these cases, you should normal-
ize the power window.
To normalize the power window:
1. Push down the power window switch
and lower the window halfway.
2. Pull up the switch until the window
closes and hold the switch for a sec-
ond.
Make sure that the window opens and
closes automatically. If the power window
cannot be operated properly, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.

The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.

28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS CAUTION
Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
Use the switch on each passenger’s
To avoid serious personal injury, you especially with the ignition key still
door or the switches on the driver’s inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
must do the following.
door that control each passenger’s win-
dow.
Before you close the power win- use the power window switches and
dows, always make sure there is get trapped in a window. Unat-
The window moves as long as you hold tended person (particularly a small
nobody around the power windows.
the switch. child) can be involved in a serious
You must also make sure the
To open: Push down the switch. heads, hands and other parts of the accident.
To close: Pull up the switch. bodies of all occupants are kept
If you push in the window lock switch on completely inside the vehicle. If
the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows someone’s neck, head or hands get
cannot be operated. caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious in-
jury. When anyone closes the power
windows, make sure he or she op-
erates the windows safely.

When small children are in the ve-
hicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervi-
sion. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unex-
pected use of the switches.

Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Power back window

If the battery is disconnected or run Automatic operation: To open or close
down, the power back window may not the back window, push and hold the “”
operate automatically and the jam protec- (down) or “
” (up) switch. The window
tion function will not function correctly af- will fully open or close. To stop the win-
ter you reconnect, replace or recharge the dow partway, push the switch on either
battery. In any of these cases, you should the “” (down) or “
” (up) side briefly.
normalize the power back window with the Key off operation: If both front doors are
power back window switch. closed, it works for 43 seconds even after
To normalize the power back window: the ignition switch is turned off. It stops
1. Push the “” (down) switch and lower working when either front door is opened.
the window halfway. Jam protection function: During automat-
2. Push the “
” (up) switch until the win- ic closing operation or key off closing op-
dow closes and hold the switch for a eration, the window stops and opens half
second. way if something gets caught between the
The back window can be operated with
the switch on the instrument panel or window and window frame.
Make sure that the window opens and
the key operation in the back door key- closes automatically. If the power back If the window receives a strong impact,
hole. window cannot be operated properly, have this function may work even if nothing is
it checked by your Toyota dealer. caught.
The power back window works when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. OPERATING FROM INSIDE
CAUTION
You can open the back window when the The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-
back window wiper is working. At that tion.
Never try jamming any part of your
time, the wiper stops working until the body to activate the jam protection
window is closed again. Normal operation: To open or close the
back window, quickly push and release the function intentionally.
If the back window is not fully closed, the “” (down) or “
” (up) switch.
The jam protection function may
back window wiper, washer and defogger not work if something gets caught
will not work. (See “Back window wiper just before the window is fully
and washer” on page 138 and “Back win- closed.
dow and outside rear view mirror defog-
gers” on page 139 in Section 1- 5.)

30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The back window can be opened and
closed with the key operation in the back
door keyhole.
To open: Turn the key fully counterclock-
wise and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the window
begins to open. To stop the window part-
way, release the key.
To close: Turn the key fully clockwise and
hold it.
After the door is locked, the window be-
gins to close. To stop the window partway,
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the back window cannot release the key.
be operated. This door key linked function can be dis-
abled. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Jam protection function: During closing
operation, the window stops and opens
half way if something gets caught between
the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Back door

CAUTION
Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
To avoid serious personal injury, you especially with the ignition key still
must do the following. inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

Before you close the power back use the power back window switch
window, always make sure there is and get trapped in a window. Unat-
nobody around the power back win- tended person (particularly a small
dow. You must also make sure the child) can be involved in a serious
heads, hands and other parts of the accident.
bodies of all occupants are kept
Keep the back window closed while
completely inside the vehicle. If driving. This not only keeps the
someone’s neck, head or hands get luggage from being thrown out but
caught in a closing window, it also prevents exhaust gases from
could result in death or serious in- entering the vehicle. To open the back door, push up the
jury. When anyone closes the power
Never try jamming any part of your back door opener.
back window, make sure he or she body to activate the jam protection The back door can be opened when the
operates the window safely. function intentionally. vehicle is stopped.

When small children are in the ve-
The jam protection function may If the back door opener does not operate
hicle, never let them use the power not work if something gets caught except when the battery is disconnected
back window switch without super- just before the window is fully or run down, contact your Toyota dealer.
vision. Use the window lock switch closed.
to prevent them from making unex- If the battery is disconnected or run
pected use of the switch. down, the back door does not open after
To open the back window with the wire- you reconnect, replace or recharge the

Be sure to remove the ignition key less remote control transmitter, see battery. In any of these cases, you should
when you leave your vehicle. “—Opening back window” on page 18 in normalize the back door.
this Section.

32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

To normalize the back door, unlock it with When all the side doors and back door
the key, remote control transmitter or pow- are unlocked simultaneously with a key,
er door lock switch, see “—Locking and the interior light, luggage compartment
unlocking doors” on page 16 and “Side light, ignition switch light and running
doors” on page 22 in this Section. board lights (on some models) will come
Make sure that the back door opens. If on and remain on for about 15 seconds
the back door cannot be opened properly, before fading out. (For details, see “Interi-
have it checked by your Toyota dealer. or light” on page 134, “Luggage compart-
ment light” on page 135, “Ignition switch
The back door can be locked or unlocked light” on page 136 and “Running board
in the following ways. lights” on page 137 in Section 1- 5.)

All the side doors and back door lock The back window can be opened and
and unlock simultaneously with the closed with the key operation in the back
back door. Insert the key into the key- door keyhole. (For details, see “Power
hole, turn it clockwise to lock and turn back window” on page 30 in this Section.) When closing the back door, the inside
it counterclockwise to unlock. strap can be used to make the reach

Operate the power door lock switch. easier.
(See “Side doors” on page 22 in this To close the back door, lower it and press
Section.) down on it. After closing the back door,

Operate the wireless remote control. try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-
(See “—Locking and unlocking doors” ly closed.
on page 16 in this Section.) Back door closer: When the back door

All the side doors and back door are has not been fully closed, it is automati-
locked and unlocked simultaneously cally closed completely.
with the driver’s door. (See “Side See “—Stowage precautions” on page 305
doors” on page 22 in this Section.) in Section 2 for precautions when loading
If the battery terminal is disconnected and luggage.
reconnected, the back door will be auto-
matically locked. Be careful not to lock
your keys in the vehicle.

33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Hood

CAUTION

Keep the back window and back

door closed while driving. This not
only keeps the luggage from being
thrown out but also prevents ex-
haust gases from entering the ve-
hicle.

Careful attention is needed so as
not to get your fingers trapped as
the back door automatically closes
when it has not been fully closed.

Never allow a child to operate the
back door. To open the hood: 2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood will spring up slightly. hood.
NOTICE Before closing the hood, check to see that
CAUTION you have not forgotten any tools, rags,

To avoid damage to the back door
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure
dampers, do not apply any force,
Before driving, be sure that the hood it locks into place. If necessary, press
paint or let any other foreign matter
is closed and securely locked. Other- down gently on the front edge to lock it.
on them.
wise, the hood may open unexpected-

Do not apply excessive force when ly while driving and an accident may
the back door closer is operating. occur.
Otherwise, the back door closer
may become defective.

34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Theft deterrent system

The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.
4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the ve-
hicle.
Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.
CANCELING THE SYSTEM
The system will cancel under the any of
the following conditions:

To deter vehicle theft, the system is SETTING THE SYSTEM

Any of the side doors, back door or
designed to sound an alarm if any of hood is opened.
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
the side doors, back door or hood is position and remove it.

Any of the side doors or the back door
forcibly unlocked or opened or the bat- is unlocked.
The indicator light will start flashing when
tery terminal is disconnected and then
the key is removed from the ignition

The key is inserted into the ignition.
reconnected when the vehicle is locked.
switch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”
The battery terminal is reconnected.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently on page 14 in this Section for details.) WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET
and flashes the headlights, tail lights and
turn signal lights, and turns on the interior 2. Have all passengers get out of the Activating the system
and luggage compartment lights. vehicle.
The system will sound the alarm under
3. Close and lock all the side doors, back the following conditions:
door and hood.

If any of the side doors is unlocked or
The indicator light will remain on when all opened without the key or wireless re-
the side doors, back door and hood are mote control transmitter, or if the back
closed and locked. door or hood is forcibly opened.

35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Fuel tank cap

If the battery terminal is disconnected If the battery becomes discharged due
and then reconnected. to the vehicle being unused for a long

If the ignition is hotwired. time, etc., when the battery is recharged
or replaced, the system will give the
The indicator light will come on when the alarm. If this happens, immediately unlock
system is activated. any of the side doors or the back door
If the alarm has been activated and the with the key or the wireless remote con-
key is not in the ignition switch, all the trol transmitter, and the alarm will stop.
side doors and back door will re- lock au- TESTING THE SYSTEM
tomatically.
1. Open all the windows.
After one minute, the alarm will automati-
cally stop and the indicator light will starts 2. Set the system as described above.
flashing again. The side doors and back door should
be locked with the key or wireless re-
Reactivating the alarm mote control transmitter. Be sure to This indicates that the fuel filler door
Once set, the system automatically resets wait until the indicator light goes off or is on the left side of your vehicle.
the alarm after the alarm stops. starts flashing.
The alarm will activate again under the 3. Unlock any side door from the inside.
same circumstances described in The system should activate the alarm.
“Activating the system”. 4. Stop the alarm as described above.
Stopping the alarm 5. Repeat this operation for the other
The alarm will be stopped by the following doors and hood. When testing the
these ways: hood, also check that the system is

Unlock any of the side doors or the activated when the battery terminal is
back door with the key or wireless re- disconnected and then reconnected.
mote control transmitter. If the system does not work properly,

Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK” have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
to “ON” position.
These ways cancel the system at the
same time.
36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the 2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
lever. the cap counterclockwise by 90 de-
When refueling, turn off the engine. grees (to the pressure point 1), and
then turn it an additional 30 degrees
(to point 2). Pause slightly before
CAUTION
removing it.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
low open flames when refueling. when the cap is opened.
The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not re-
move the cap quickly. In hot weath-
er, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly re-
moved.

37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Electric moon roof

3. The removed cap can be stored on
NOTICE
the back side of the fuel filler door.
Position the cap so that the hooks point To prevent damage to the cap, apply
to the left and right or up and down, and force only in the turning direction to
set it in the receptacle on the back side the cap. Do not pull or pry it.
of the door.
When installing the cap, turn the cap
clockwise until you hear a click. When
you hear the click, the cap is fully
closed.
If the cap is not installed securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
Sliding operation
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank
cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

Tilting operation

38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

To operate the moon roof, use the The roof will fully close automatically. To Key off operation: If both front doors are
switch beside the personal lights. stop the roof partway, push the switch on closed, it works for 43 seconds even after
The moon roof works when the ignition either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP” the ignition switch is turned off. It stops
switch is in the “ON” position. side quickly. working when either front door is opened.
The sun shade can be opened or closed When you quickly push and release the Jam protection function:
by hand. switch, the moon roof will close while the
If something gets caught between the
switch is being pushed and stop when moon roof and frame during slide clos-
Sliding operation— released. ing operation, the moon roof stops and
To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDE Tilting operation— opens half way, and the deflector stops
OPEN” side. and raises fully.
To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILT
The roof will fully open automatically. To UP” side.
If something gets caught between the
stop the roof partway, push the switch on moon roof and frame during tilting
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP” The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch on down operation, the moon roof stops
side quickly. and opens fully.
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
When you quickly push and release the side quickly. If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
switch, the moon roof will open while the this function may work even if nothing is
switch is being pushed and stop when When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the caught.
released.
switch is being pushed and stop when If the battery is disconnected or run
The sun shade will be opened together released. down, the moon roof may not operate
with the roof. automatically and the jam protection func-
To tilt down: Push the switch on the
When the moon roof is opened fully, the “SLIDE OPEN” side. tion will not function correctly after you
deflector will raise to reduce the entering reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.
of the strong wind. The angle of the de- The roof will fully tilt down automatically. In any of these cases, you should normal-
flector will be adjusted according to the To stop the roof partway, push the switch ize the moon roof.
vehicle speed. on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side quickly. To normalize the moon roof, push and
To close: Push the switch on the “TILT hold the switch on the “TILT UP” side until
UP” side. When you quickly push and release the the moon roof tilts all the way up and
switch, the moon roof will tilt down while then tilts down a little automatically.
the switch is being pushed and stop when
released.
39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Make sure that the moon roof opens and

closes automatically. If the moon roof can-
Never leave anyone (particularly a
not be operated properly, have it checked small child) alone in your vehicle,
by your Toyota dealer. especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
CAUTION use the moon roof switch and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unat-
To avoid serious personal injury, you tended person (particularly a small
must do the following. child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

While the vehicle is moving, always
keep the heads, hands and other
Never sit on top of the vehicle
parts of the bodies of all occupants around the roof opening.
away from the roof opening. Other-
Never try jamming any part of your
wise, they could be seriously in- body to activate the jam protection
jured if the vehicle stops suddenly function intentionally.
or if the vehicle is involved in an
The jam protection function may
accident. not work if something gets caught

Before you close the moon roof, just before the moon roof is fully
always make sure there is nobody closed.
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
first make sure it is safe to do so.

Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 3
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Front seats—
Seats —Front seat precautions
While the vehicle is being driven, all ve- Driver seat
hicle occupants should have the seatback
Slightly recline the back of the
upright, sit well back in the seat and prop- CAUTION seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
erly wear the seat belts provided. many drivers can achieve the 250
The SRS driver airbag deploys with mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
CAUTION considerable force, and can cause driver seat all the way forward, sim-
death or serious injury especially if ply by reclining the back of the

Do not drive the vehicle unless the the driver is very close to the airbag. seat somewhat. If reclining the back
occupants are properly seated. Do The National Highway Traffic Safety of your seat makes it hard to see
not allow any passengers to sit on Administration (“NHTSA”) advises: the road, raise yourself by using a
top of a folded- down seatback, or firm, non- slippery cushion, or raise
Since the risk zone for driver airbag the seat if your vehicle has that
in the luggage compartment or car- is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
go area. Persons not properly feature.
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
seated and/or not properly re- in.) from your driver airbag provides
If your steering wheel is adjustable,
strained by seat belts can be se- you with a clear margin of safety. tilt it downward. This points the air-
verely injured in the event of emer- This distance is measured from the bag toward your chest instead of
gency braking or a collision. center of the steering wheel to your your head and neck.

During driving, do not allow any breastbone. If you sit less than 250 The seat should be adjusted as rec-
passengers to stand up or move mm (10 in.) away now, you can ommended by NHTSA above, while
around between seats. Otherwise, change your driving position in sever- still maintaining control of the foot
severe injuries can occur in the al ways: pedals, steering wheel, and your view
event of emergency braking or a
Move your seat to the rear as far of the instrument panel controls.
collision. as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Seat adjustment precautions

Front passenger seat Front seats (with SRS side airbags)
CAUTION
CAUTION CAUTION

Do not adjust the seat while the
The SRS front passenger airbag also The SRS side airbags are installed in vehicle is moving as the seat may
deploys with considerable force, and the driver and front passenger seats. unexpectedly move and cause the
can cause death or serious injury es- Observe the following precautions. driver to lose control of the vehicle.
pecially if the front passenger is very
Do not lean against the front door
Be careful that the seat does not
close to the airbag. The front passen- when the vehicle is in use, since hit a passenger or luggage.
ger seat should be as far from the the side airbag inflates with consid-
After adjusting the seat position, re-
airbag as possible with the seatback erable speed and force. Otherwise, lease the lever and try sliding the
adjusted, so the front passenger sits you may be killed or seriously in- seat forward and backward to make
upright. jured. sure it is locked in position.

Do not use seat accessories which
After adjusting the seatback, push
cover the area where the side air- your body back against the seat to
bags inflate. Such accessories may make sure the seat is locked in
prevent the side airbags from acti- position.
vating correctly, causing death or
Do not put objects under the seats.
serious injury. Otherwise, the objects may interfere

Do not modify or replace the seats with the seat- lock mechanism or
or upholstery of the seats with side unexpectedly push up the seat posi-
airbags. Such change may prevent tion adjusting lever and the seat
the side airbag system from activat- may suddenly move, causing the
ing correctly, disable the system or driver to lose control of the vehicle.
cause the side airbags to inflate ac-
cidentally, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.

43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Adjusting front seats

(manual seat)
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

While adjusting the seat, do not put
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
your hands under the seat or near
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
injured.
2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING
KNOB
To change the angle of the seat cush-
ion on the front side, turn the knob
either way.
3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER
To change the height of the seat, pull
up or push down the lever.
4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
LEVER
Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Adjusting front seats (power

seat)
1. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,
CAUTION SEAT CUSHION ANGLE AND SEAT
HEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH
Avoid reclining the seatback any
PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION
more than needed. The seat belts pro-
ADJUSTING SWITCH
vide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and Move the control switch in the desired
the front passenger are sitting up direction.
straight and well back in the seats. If Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
you are reclined, the lap belt may that position.
slide past your hips and apply re-
Do not place anything under the front
straint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoul- seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
der belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is re- 2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
clined, the greater the risk of death SWITCH
or personal injury. Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
5. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT Releasing the switch will stop the seat-
ADJUSTING SWITCH back at that position.
Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change
while the switch is pushed.

45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Flattening seatbacks
(manual seat)

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-
vide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply re-
straint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoul-
der belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is re- 1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the 2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-
clined, the greater the risk of death center of the lever and pull it up. ver to unlock and push down the
or personal injury. Then slide the seat further forward seatback.
than the front- most lock position. When returning the seatback upright, be
3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT careful not to make yourself hit by the
ADJUSTING SWITCH seatback which will bound with consid-
Push the control switch on either side. erable spring force.
The amount of lumbar support will change After returning the seat to its original
while the switch is pushed. position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Flattening seatbacks
(power seat)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try
pushing the seat and seatback for-
ward and rearward to make sure it
is secured in place. Be certain to
replace the head restraint.

1. Remove the head restraint. Push the 2. Move the seatback angle adjusting
seat position adjusting switch for- switch backward to flatten the seat-
ward to slide the seat further for- back.
ward than the front- most position. After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear seats—
—Folding down rear seats
(vehicles without third seats)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try
pushing the seat and seatback for-
ward and rearward to make sure it
is secured in place. Be certain to
replace the head restraint.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT If you are using a trash holder, lower
Stow the rear center seat belt buckle as it.
shown in the illustration.
This prevents the seat belt buckle from
falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE
The seat belt buckle must be stowed
before you fold the seatback.

48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowe- 2. Swing the bottom cushion up by 3. Push the lock release button and
st position. pulling the lock release strap. fold down the seatback.
Each bottom cushion can be swung up This will enlarge the luggage compartment
separately. as far as the raised seat cushion. See
“—Stowage precautions” on page 305 in
Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
Each seatback can be folded separately.

49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Rear seat precautions

(vehicles with third seats)

CAUTION CAUTION

When returning seats to their original
Adjustment should not be made

position, observe the following pre- while the vehicle is moving.
cautions in order to prevent personal
When adjusting the seat, be careful
injury in a collision or sudden stop: not to hit the seat against a pas-

Make sure the seatback is securely senger or luggage.
locked by pushing forward and rear-
After adjusting the seatback, push
ward on the top of the seatback. back your body to make sure it is
Failure to do so will prevent the locked in position.
seat belt from operating properly.

When returning seats to their origi-

Make sure the seat belts are not nal position, observe the following
twisted or caught in the seatback precautions in order to prevent per-
WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK and are arranged in their proper sonal injury in a collision or sud-
If you cannot raise the seatback because position and are ready to use. den stop:
of the locked seat belt, do not try to force
Make sure the bottom cushion is Make sure the seat is securely
it. Release the lock of the seat belt in the securely locked by trying to pull up
following way. locked by pushing forward and rear-
the edge of the cushion near the ward on the top of the seatback or
1. Push in the lower front edge of the lock release straps. by trying to pull up the edge of the
seatback to slacken the seat belt.
Make sure to arrange the buckles of bottom cushion. Failure to do so
2. Let the seat belt retract a little. the seat belts in their proper posi- will prevent the seat belt from oper-
tion and be ready to use. ating properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught under the seat
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Adjusting rear seats

(vehicles with third seats)
SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

The third seats have a maximum
Lean forward and pull the lock release
capacity of two belted occupants
lever. Then lean back to the desired
who do not exceed 150 cm (59 in.)
in height. Exceeding these limits angle and release the lever.
can result in increased risk of seri-
ous personal injuries or death. CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

Folding the seats up will enlarge the lug- more than needed. The seat belts pro-
gage compartment. See “—Stowage pre- vide maximum protection in a frontal
cautions” on page 305 in Section 2 for or rear collision when the passengers
precautions when loading luggage. are sitting up straight and well back
in the seats. If you are reclined, the
Second seats lap belt may slide past your hips and
apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is re-
clined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.

Third seats

51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Tumbling second seats

BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEATS TUMBLING SECOND SEATS WHEN RETURNING SECOND SEATS
Stow the second seat belt buckles as Lower the head restraints to the lowest Push the knob to unlock the seat,
shown in the illustration. position. Fold down the seatback while swing the whole seat down and swing
This prevents the buckles from falling out pulling the seatback angle adjusting le- the seatback up.
when you tumble the second seat. ver, then swing the whole seat up and
forward until they are locked.
NOTICE Tumbling the second seats will enlarge the
floor space for third seat entry. It will also
The seat belt buckles must be stowed
enlarge the luggage compartment when
before you tumble the second seat.
the third seats are not used. See “—Stow-
age precautions” on page 305 in Section
2 for precautions when loading luggage.

52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION To prevent personal injury in a colli-

sion or sudden stop:
When tumbling seats or returning
Do not sit on or place anything on
seats to their original positions, ob- the folded seatback or tumbled seat
serve the following to prevent person- while driving.
al injury:

Make sure the seat is securely

Do not tumble or return the seat locked by pushing forward and rear-
while the vehicle is moving. ward on the top of the seatback or

Make sure people or luggage are by trying to pull up the edge of the
clear of the seat. Then, hold the bottom cushion. Failure to do so
seat and slowly move it. Otherwise, will prevent the seat belt from oper-
people may be injured or luggage ating properly.

If you cannot raise the seatback because

may be damaged, if the seat hits
Make sure the seat belts are not
them. twisted or caught under the seat
of the locked seat belt, do not try to force
it. Release the lock of the seat belt in the
Be careful not to get your hands or and are arranged in their proper
following way. feet pinched in the seat. position and are ready to use.

1. Push in the lower front edge of the

seatback to slacken the seat belt.
2. Let the seat belt retract a little.

53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Folding up third seats

BEFORE FOLDING UP THIRD SEATS 2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes FOLDING UP THIRD SEATS
1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as through the hanger. 1. Lower the head restraint to the low-
shown in the illustration. This prevents the shoulder belt from being est position. Fold down the seatback
This prevents the buckles from falling out damaged. while pushing the seatback angle ad-
when you fold up the third seats. justing lever.
CAUTION Folding up the third seats will enlarge the
NOTICE luggage compartment. See “—Stowage
The seat belt must be removed from precautions” on page 305 in Section 2 for
The seat belt buckles must be stowed the hanger when the seat belt is in precautions when loading luggage.
before you fold up the third seats. use.

54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

2. Unlock the seat leg by pulling the 3. Stow the seat leg in the back of the 4. Remove the seat anchor covers from
handle behind the seat, and swing seat cushion. Take the holding strap the back of the seat cushion, and
the whole seat up and sideward. out of its holder, and attach the install them over the seat anchors.
strap to the assist grip. Tighten the
strap by pulling the end and fix it CAUTION
with Velcro.
Be sure to apply the covers on the
CAUTION seat anchors, or you may get burned
when they become hot.
When folding up the third seats, fix
the seats securely by adjusting the
length of the holding strap. Failure to
do so may cause an unexpected inju-
ry in the event of emergency braking
or collision.

55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Removing third seats

CAUTION

When folding up seats or returning

seats to their original positions, ob-
serve the following to prevent person-
al injury:

Do not fold up or return the seat
while the vehicle is moving.

Be careful not to hit the seat
against a person or drop it on your-
self.
To prevent personal injury in a colli-
When returning the third seat to its origi- sion or sudden stop: BEFORE REMOVING THIRD SEATS
nal position, stow the holding strap in the
Do not sit on or place anything on 1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as
holder in the direction shown above. Then the folded seatback while driving. shown in the illustration.
do the above procedures in the reverse
Make sure the seat is securely
order. This prevents the buckles from falling out
locked by pushing forward and rear- when you remove the third seats.
ward on the top of the seatback or
by trying to pull up the edge of the NOTICE
bottom cushion. Failure to do so
will prevent the seat belt from oper- The seat belt buckles must be stowed
ating properly. before you remove the third seats.

Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught under the seat
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes REMOVING THIRD SEATS 2. Unlock the seat leg by pulling the
through the hanger. 1. Lower the head restraint to the low- handle behind the seat, and lift the
This prevents the shoulder belt from being est position. Fold down the seatback whole seat up. Retract the seat leg
damaged. while pushing the seatback angle ad- into the back of the seat cushion.
justing lever. Then, place the seat on the floor.
CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.

57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

3. Remove the cover and push the seat 4. Remove the seat anchor covers from
lock release lever outward to unlock the back of the seat cushion, and
the seat lock, then pull up the whole install them over the seat anchors.
seat and remove it. After removing
the seat, reinstall the cover. CAUTION
Removing the third seats will enlarge the
luggage compartment. See “—Stowage Be sure to apply the covers on the
precautions” on page 305 in Section 2 for seat anchors, or you may get burned
precautions when loading luggage. when they become hot.

NOTICE
Avoid putting heavy loads on the re-
moved seat. The metallic tips of the
seat leg may be damaged and the
seat cannot be reinstalled.

58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

REINSTALLING THIRD SEATS

1. Remove the seat anchor covers from
the floor and install them in the
back of the seat cushion. Hold the
seat and engage the seat striker to
the seat lock, then place the seat on
the floor. Press down the seatback
to securely lock the seat to the
body.

2. Pull out the seat leg from the back 3. Raise the seatback while pushing
of the seat cushion and lock it on down the seatback angle adjusting
the anchor. Reinstall the cover. lever.

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the

seat, observe the following to prevent
personal injury:

Do not fold or remove the seat
while the vehicle is moving.

Be careful not to get your hands or
feet pinched in the seat.

Be careful not to hit the removed
seat against a person or drop it on
yourself.

59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Head restraints

When reinstalling the seat, be care-

ful not to hit the seat against your-
self or the vehicle.
To prevent personal injury in a colli-
sion or sudden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything on
the folded seatback while driving.

Do not leave the removed seat un-
secured in the vehicle.

Do not try to sit on or place any-
thing on the removed seat.

Reinstall each seat in its original Front seats Second seats—vehicles with third seats
position. Failure to do so will pre-
vent third seat occupants from us-
ing seat belts properly.

Make sure the seat is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback or
by trying to pull up the edge of the
bottom cushion. Failure to do so
will prevent the seat belt from oper-
ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught under the seat
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
Rear seats—vehicles without third seats Third seats

60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Armrest
For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving. CAUTION
To raise: Pull it up.

Adjust the center of the head re-
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
straint so that it is closest to the
lock release button.
top of your ears.
Front head restraints—You can also move
After adjusting the head restraint,
the head restraint forward or backward. If
make sure it is locked in position.
such adjustment is desired, pull or push
the base of the head restraint.
Do not drive with the head re-
straints removed.
Rear head restraints (vehicles without
third seats) and a second center head
restraint (vehicles with third seats)—When
an occupant sits on the rear seat (ve-
hicles without third seats) or second cen- To use the armrest, pull it out as
ter seat (vehicles with third seats), always shown above.
pull up the rear head restraint to the lock
This armrest is equipped with cup holders
position.
and tray. (For details, see “Rear cup hold-
The head restraint is most effective when ers and tray” on page 271 or “Rear cup
it is close to your head. Therefore, using holders” on page 272 in Section 1- 10.)
a cushion on the seatback is not recom-
mended. NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest,
avoid putting heavy loads on it.

61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Seat heaters

CAUTION NOTICE

Do not put unevenly weighed ob-
Occupants must use caution when op-
jects on the seat and do not stick
erating the seat heater because it
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
may make them feel too hot or cause
into the seat.
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;
When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thin-

Babies, small children, elderly per- ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
sons, sick persons or persons with
etc.). They may damage the heater
physical disabilities
and seat surface.

Persons who have sensitive skin
To prevent the battery from being

Persons who are exhausted discharged, turn the system off
To turn on the seat heater, move the
Persons who have taken alcohol or when the engine is not running.
dial forward (“L” dial for the left front drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
seat and “R” dial for the right front drug, cold remedy, etc.)
seat). At this time, the indicator light To prevent the seat overheating, do
will illuminate to indicate the seat heat- not use the seat heater with a blan-
er is operating. ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-
To turn off the seat heater, move the jects which cover the seat.
dial backward until it stops.
Move the dial forward or backward to ad-
just to the desired temperature. When the
seat heater is not in use, move the dial
fully backward.
The key must be in the “ON” position.

62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and Do not allow any children to stand up or
passengers in the vehicle be properly re- kneel on either rear or front seats. An CAUTION
strained at all times with the seat belts unrestrained child could suffer serious in-
provided. Failure to do so could increase jury or death during emergency braking or Persons should ride in their seats
the chance of injury and/or the severity of a collision. Also, do not let the child sit properly wearing their seat belts
injury in accidents. on your lap. Holding a child in your arms whenever the vehicle is moving.
does not provide sufficient restraint. Otherwise, they are much more likely
The seat belts provided for your vehicle
to suffer serious bodily injury or
are designed for people of adult size, Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
death in the event of sudden braking
large enough to properly wear them. use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
or a collision.
Child. Use a child restraint system ap- specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as When using the seat belts, observe
propriate for the child until the child be-
possible over the hips and not on the the following:
comes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint” waist.
Use the belt for only one person at
on page 95 in this Section for details. Injured person. Toyota recommends the a time. Do not use a single belt for
use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju- two or more people—even children.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear ry, first check with your doctor for specific
Avoid reclining the seatback any
seat and must be restrained using the recommendation. more than needed. The seat belts
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident provide maximum protection in a
statistics, the child is safer when properly frontal or rear collision when the
restrained in the rear seat than in the driver and the front passenger are
front seat. sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
and apply restraint forces directly
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
to the abdomen or your neck may
worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-
contact the shoulder belt. In the
tion of the airbag may cause death or
event of a frontal collision, the
serious injury to the child.
more the seat is reclined, the great-
er the risk of death or personal in-
jury.

63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Fastening front and rear

seat belts
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

Be careful not to damage the belt pletely extended and is then retracted
webbing or hardware. Take care that even slightly, the belt is locked in that
they do not get caught or pinched position and cannot be extended. This fea-
in the seat or side doors. ture is used to hold the child restraint

Inspect the belt system periodically. system securely. (For details, see “Child
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose restraint” on page 95 in this Section.) To
parts. Damaged parts should be re- free the belt again, fully retract the belt
placed. Do not disassemble or Tab and then pull the belt out once more.
modify the system. Buckle If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

Keep the belts clean and dry. If retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
they need cleaning, use a mild soap it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
solution or lukewarm water. Never the belt out of the retractor.
use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-
ers, or allow them to come into Adjust the seat as needed and sit up CAUTION
contact with the belt—they may se- straight and well back in the seat. To
verely weaken the belts. (See fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-
After inserting the tab, make sure
“Cleaning the interior” on page 357 tractor and insert the tab into the the tab and buckle are locked and
in Section 5.) buckle. that the belt is not twisted.

Replace the belt assembly (includ- You will hear a click when the tab locks
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
ing bolts) if it has been used in a into the buckle. the buckle as this may prevent you
severe impact. The entire assembly The seat belt length automatically adjusts from properly latching the tab and
should be replaced even if damage to your size and the seat position. buckle.
is not obvious. The retractor will lock the belt during a
If the seat belt does not function
sudden stop or on impact. It also may normally, immediately contact your
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to until the seat belt is fixed, because
extend, and you can move around freely. it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from injury.

64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION
Take up
slack
Both high- positioned lap belts and
loose- fitting belts could cause seri-
Too high ous injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended event. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on hips
as possible.

Do not place the shoulder belt un-
Keep as low on der your arm.
hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
shoulder belts. anchor—
Position the lap belt as low as possible Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
on your hips—not on your waist, then ad- your size.
just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder To raise: Slide the anchor up.
portion upward through the latch plate. To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Stowing rear seat belt

buckles

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
serious injuries in a collision.

Rear center seat—vehicles without third

To release the belt, press the buckle seats
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it re-
tracts.

Second seats—vehicles with third seats

66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-
curely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is avail-
able from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer to
order the proper required length for the
extender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-
pect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering in-
formation is available at your Toyota deal-
er.

Third seats CAUTION

If the seat belt extender has been
When using the seat belt extender, connected to the driver’s seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be
observe the following precautions. buckle without wearing the seat belt
stowed when not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions when using the extender in the
Seat belt buckle must be stowed before could reduce the effectiveness of the driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-
you fold the seatback. (See “—Folding seat belt restraint system in case of bag system will judge that the driv-
down rear seats” on page 48, “—Tumbling an accident, increasing the chance of er wears the seat belt even if not
second seats” on page 52, “—Folding up personal injury. wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
third seats” on page 54 or “—Removing

Remember that the extender pro- airbag may not activate correctly,
third seats” on page 56 in this Section.)
vided for you may not be safe when causing death or serious injury in
used on a different vehicle, for the event of collision. Be sure to
another person, or at a different wear the seat belt with the seat belt
seating position than the one origi- extender.
nally intended.

67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Make sure the front passenger oc-
Do not use the seat belt extender
cupant classification indicator light when installing a child restraint
indicates “ON” when using the seat system on the front or rear passen-
belt extender for the front passen- ger seat. If installing a child re-
ger seat. If the indicator light indi- straint system with the seat belt
cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend- extender connected to the seat belt,
er tongue from the seat belt buckle, the seat belt will not securely hold
then reconnect the seat belt. Recon- the child restraint system, which
nect the seat belt extender after could cause death or serious injury
making sure the indicator light indi- to the child or other passengers in
cates “ON”. If you use the seat belt the event of collision.
extender while the indicator light
indicates “OFF”, the front passen-
ger airbag and side airbag on the
To connect the extender to the seat
front passenger side may not acti-
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
vate correctly, which could cause
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
death or serious injury in the event
the buckle release buttons of the ex-
of collision.
tender and the seat belt are both facing

Be sure to wear the seat belt with- outward as shown.
out the seat belt extender if you
You will hear a click when the tab locks
can fasten the seat belt without the
into the buckle.
extender.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extend-
er itself.

68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Seat belt pretensioners

As far as the seat belt extender on the The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-
front passenger side is concerned, do not er will not activate if no passenger is
fail to disconnect the extender from the detected in the front passenger seat by
seat belt after the above operation in or- the front passenger occupant classification
der to activate the front passenger airbag system. However, the front passenger’s
correctly when getting into the vehicle seat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-
next time. gage is put on the seat, or the seat belt
When not in use, remove the extender is buckled up regardless of the presence
and store in the vehicle for future use. of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
CAUTION
classification system” on page 90 in this
Section.)

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-
that the lap and shoulder portions The driver and front passenger seat bags may not operate together in all colli-
of the belt and the seat belt extend- belt pretensioners are designed to be sions.
activated in response to a severe fron-
er are not twisted.
tal impact. On vehicles equipped with

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in curtain shield airbags, the pretensioners
the buckle as this may prevent you are also activated during vehicle rol-
from properly latching the tab and lover.
buckle. When the sensor detects a severe frontal

If the seat belt does not function impact or a vehicle rollover, the front seat
normally, immediately contact your belts are quickly drawn back by the re-
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat tractors so that the belts snugly restrain
until the seat belt is fixed, because the occupants.
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from injury.

69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The seat belt pretensioners will not oper-

ate in a vehicle rollover if the “RSCA
OFF” indicator light is on. For details, see
“Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” on page 94 in this Section.

Type A
The seat belt pretensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components
and their locations are shown in the il-
lustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Front passenger occupant classification
indicator light
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch
Type B 7. Airbag sensor assembly

70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled

by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
Do not modify or change the sus- NOTICE
sensor assembly consists of a safing sen- pension system. Such changes may
Do not perform any of the following
sor and airbag sensor. cause the curtain shield airbags to
changes without consulting your
inflate accidentally, which could re- Toyota dealer. Such changes can
When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-
sult in death or serious injury. Con- interfere with proper operation of the
vated, an operating noise may be heard
sult your Toyota dealer about any seat belt pretensioners in some
and a small amount of non- toxic gas may
repair and modification. cases.
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
Do not use tires or wheels other
Installation of electronic devices
harmless. than the manufacture’s recom- such as a mobile two- way radio,
Once the seat belt pretensioners have mended size. Such a use may cause cassette tape player or compact
been activated, the seat belt retractors the curtain shield airbags and seat disc player
remain locked. belt pretensioners to inflate acci-

Repairs on or near the front seat
dentally, which could result in death
or serious injury. For details, see
belt retractor assemblies
CAUTION
“Checking and replacing tires” on
Modification of the front end struc-
ture

Do not modify, remove, strike or page 384 in Section 7- 2.
open the seat belt pretensioner as-
Do not place luggage heavier than
Attachment of a grille guard (bull
semblies, airbag sensor or sur- specified on the roof luggage carri- bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
rounding area or wiring. Failure to er. Such luggage may cause the winches or any other equipment to
follow these instructions may pre- curtain shield airbags and seat belt the front end
vent the seat belt pretensioners pretensioners to inflate accidentally,
Repairs made on or near the front
from activating correctly, cause sud- which could result in death or seri- fenders, front end structure or con-
den operation of the system or dis- ous injury. For details, see “Roof sole
able the system, which could result luggage carrier” on page 277 in
in death or serious injury. Consult Section 1- 10.
your Toyota dealer about any repair
and modification.

71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

This warning light system monitors the The SRS warning light will come on and
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- front passenger occupant classification in-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- a malfunction in the front passenger occu-
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt pant classification system.
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-
ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service remind-
er indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 145 in Section 1- 6.)
This indicator comes on when the igni- If any of the following conditions occurs,
tion key is turned to the “ON” position. this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
means the seat belt pretensioners are Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
operating properly.

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.

If any seat belt does not retract or can
not be pulled out due to a malfunction
or activation of the relevant seat belt
pretensioner.

The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged.
72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SRS airbags—
—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work together with
the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The SRS front airbags help re-
duce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front
passenger’s head or chest caused by hit-
ting the vehicle interior.
The SRS front passenger airbag will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if lug-
gage is put in the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up, regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
In the following cases, contact your Toyota The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- front passenger occupant classification
dealer as soon as possible: tem) front airbags are designed to pro- system, see “—Front passenger occupant

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the vide further protection for the driver classification system” on page 90 in this
illustration) was involved in an accident and front passenger in addition to the Section.)
that was not severe enough to cause primary safety protection provided by
Always wear your seat belt properly.
the seat belt pretensioners to operate. the seat belts.

Either seat belt pretensioner assembly Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED
or surrounding area is scratched, AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor
cracked, or otherwise damaged. vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag system controls airbag deployment
power for the driver and front passenger.
The driver airbag system consists of the
driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front
passenger’s airbag system consists of the
front passenger occupant classification
sensor etc.

73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The SRS front airbags are designed to

CAUTION
Improperly seated and/or restrained deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-
infants and children can be killed sions where the magnitude and duration

The SRS front airbag system is de- or seriously injured by the deploy- of the forward deceleration of the ve-
signed only as a supplement to the ing airbags. An infant or child who hicle exceeds the designed threshold
primary protection of the driver and is too small to use a seat belt level.
front passenger seat belt systems. should be properly secured using a
child restraint system. Toyota The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
The driver and front passenger can
severity of the impact is above the de-
be killed or seriously injured by the strongly recommends that all in-
signed threshold level, comparable to an
inflating airbags if they do not wear fants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and proper- approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
the available seat belts properly.
when the vehicle has the impact straight
During sudden braking just before ly restrained. The rear seat is the
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
a collision, an unrestrained driver safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installa- deform.
or front passenger can move for-
ward into direct contact with or tion of a child restraint system, see However, this threshold velocity will be
close proximity to the airbag which “Child restraint” on page 95 in this considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
may then deploy during the colli- Section. an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sion. To ensure maximum protection sign pole, which can move or deform on
in an accident, the driver and all impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
passengers in the vehicle must underride collision (e.g. a collision in
wear their seat belts properly. Wear- which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
ing a seat belt properly during an or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
accident reduces the chances of It is possible that in some collisions
death or serious injury or being where the forward deceleration of the ve-
thrown out of the vehicle. For in- hicle is very close to the designed thresh-
structions and precautions concern- old level, the SRS front airbags and the
ing the seat belt system, see “Seat seat belt pretensioners may not activate
belts” on page 63 in this Section. together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Hitting a curb, edge Falling into or

Collision from the rear of pavement or jumping over
hard surface a deep hole

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover
Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags are generally not The SRS front airbags may also deploy The SRS front airbag system consists
designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- if a serious impact occurs to the under- mainly of the following components, and
volved in a side or rear collision, if it side of your vehicle. Some examples their locations are shown in the illustra-
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low- are shown in the illustration. tion.
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a 1. Front airbag sensors
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, de- 2. SRS warning light
ployment of the SRS front airbags may 3. Front passenger occupant classification
occur. indicator light
4. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
5. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch
7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

8. Driver’s seat position sensor Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must CAUTION
9. Airbag sensor assembly
inflate with considerable force. While the
10. Airbag module for driver system is designed to reduce serious inju- The driver or front passenger who is
(airbag and inflator) ries, primarily to the head and chest, it too close to the steering wheel or
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a may also cause other, less severe injuries dashboard during airbag deployment
safing sensor and airbag sensor. to the face, chest, arms and hands. These can be killed or seriously injured.
are usually in the nature of minor burns Toyota strongly recommends that:
The front airbag sensors constantly moni-
tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
The driver sit as far back as pos-
If an impact results in a forward decelera- a deploying airbag can cause more seri- sible from the steering wheel while
tion beyond the designed threshold level, ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s still maintaining control of the ve-
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At hands, arms, chest or head is in close hicle.
proximity to the airbag module at the time
this time a chemical reaction in the infla-
The front passenger sit as far back
tors very quickly fills the airbags with of deployment. This is why it is important
as possible from the dashboard.
non- toxic gas to help restrain the forward for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
All vehicle occupants be properly
motion of the occupants. The front airbags
occupant and the airbag module; sit restrained using the available seat
then quickly deflate, so that there is no
straight and well back into the seat; wear belts.
obstruction of the driver’s vision should it
be necessary to continue driving. the available seat belt properly; and sit as For instructions and precautions con-
far as possible from the airbag module, cerning the seating position, see
When the airbags inflate, they produce a while still maintaining control of the ve- “—Front seat precautions” on page
loud noise and release some smoke and hicle. 42 in this Section.
residue along with non- toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
remain inside the vehicle for some time, hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
and may cause some minor irritation to for several minutes after deployment, so
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to do not touch! The airbags inflate only
wash off any residue as soon as possible once. The windshield may be damaged by
to prevent any potential skin irritation with absorbing some of the force of the inflat-
soap and water. If you can safely exit ing airbag.
from the vehicle, you should do so imme-
diately.
76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Do not sit on the edge of the seat
Toyota strongly recommends that all
Do not put anything or any part of
or lean against the dashboard when infants and children be placed in your body on or in front of the
the vehicle is in use, since the the rear seat of the vehicle and be dashboard or steering wheel pad
front passenger airbag could inflate properly restrained. that houses the front airbag sys-
with considerable speed and force.
Do not hold a child on your lap or tem. They might restrict inflation or
Anyone who is up against, or very in your arms. Use a child restraint cause death or serious injury as
close to, an airbag when it inflates, system in the rear seat. For instruc- they are projected rearward by the
can be killed or seriously injured. tions concerning the installation of force of the deploying airbags. Like-
Sit up straight and well back in the a child restraint system, see “Child wise, the driver and front passenger
seat, and always use your seat belt restraint” on page 95 in this Sec- should not hold objects in their
properly. tion. arms or on their knees.

77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Do not modify or remove any wir- NOTICE

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
Do not perform any of the following
or open any components such as
changes without consulting your
the steering wheel pad, steering
Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-
wheel, column cover, dashboard
terfere with proper operation of the
near the front passenger airbag,
SRS front airbag system in some
front passenger airbag or airbag
cases.
sensor assembly. Doing so may pre-
vent the front airbag system from
Installation of electronic devices
activating correctly, cause sudden such as a mobile two- way radio,
activation of the system or disable cassette tape player or compact
the system, which could result in disc player
death or serious injury.
Modification of the suspension sys-
Failure to follow these instructions tem This indicator comes on when the igni-
can result in death or serious injury.
Modification of the front end struc- tion key is turned to the “ON” position.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any ture It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
repair and modification. means the SRS front airbags are oper-

Attachment of a grille guard (bull
If you wish to modify your vehicle for ating properly.
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
a person with physical disability, con- winches or any other equipment to
sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan- the front end
gerously interfere with the SRS front

Repairs made on or near the front
airbags operation.
fenders, front end structure, con-
sole, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

This warning light system monitors the

NOTICE
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- Do not disconnect the battery cables
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- before contacting your Toyota dealer.
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-
ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service remind-
er indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 145 in Section 1- 6.)
If any of the following conditions occurs, In the following cases, contact your Toyota
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags dealer as soon as possible:
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
The SRS front airbags have been in-
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. flated.

The light does not come on when the
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi- illustration) was involved in an accident
tion or remains on for more than 6 that was not severe enough to cause
seconds or flashes. the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The light comes on or starts flashing
The pad section of the steering wheel
while driving. or dashboard (shaded in the illustra-
The SRS warning light will come on and tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-
front passenger occupant classification in- wise damaged.
dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is
a malfunction in the front passenger occu-
pant classification system.

79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the Roll sensing function:
SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbags In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-
in the impacted side work with the seat tain shield airbags on both sides work
belts to help reduce injury by inflating. with the seat belts to help reduce injury
The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries by inflating. The curtain shield airbags
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,
chest. The SRS curtain shield airbags front passenger’s or rear/second passen-
help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, ger’s head and help prevent them from
front passenger’s or rear/second passen- being thrown out of the vehicle. (This
ger’s head and help prevent them from function can be turned off if inflation is
being thrown out of the vehicle. not desired. See “Roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch” on page 94 in
The SRS side airbag on the passenger this Section.)
seat will not activate if there is no pas-
senger sitting in the front passenger seat. The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- However, the side airbag on the passen- vate even when the side airbags are not
tem) side airbags and curtain shield air- ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in activated.
bags are designed to provide further the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up Always wear your seat belt properly.
protection for the driver, front passen- regardless of the presence of the occu-
ger and rear seat passengers∗1 /second pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-
seat passengers∗2 in addition to the pri- ger occupant classification system, see
mary safety protection provided by the “—Front passenger occupant classification
seat belts. system” on page 90 in this Section.)
∗1 : Without third seats The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-
∗2 : With third seats senger side are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear/second
outside seat.

80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION
Do not allow anyone to lean his/her
Improperly seated and/or restrained
head or any part of his/her body infants and children can be killed

The SRS side airbag and curtain against the door or the area of the or seriously injured by the deploy-
shield airbag system is designed seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof ing airbags. An infant or child who
only as a supplement to the side rail from which the SRS side is too small to use a seat belt
primary protection of the driver, airbag and curtain shield airbag should be properly secured using a
front passenger and rear /second deploy even if he/she is a child child restraint system. Toyota
passenger seat belt systems. To seated in the child restraint system. strongly recommends that all in-
ensure maximum protection in an It is dangerous if the SRS side air- fants and children be placed in the
accident, the driver and all passen- bag and curtain shield airbag in- rear seats of the vehicle and prop-
gers in the vehicle must wear their flate, and the impact of the deploy- erly restrained. The rear seats are
seat belts properly. Wearing a seat ing airbag could cause death or se- the safest for infants and children.
belt properly during an accident rious injury to the occupant. For instructions concerning the
reduces the chances of death or installation of a child restraint sys-
serious injury or being thrown out tem, see “Child restraint” on page
of the vehicle. For instructions and 95 in this Section.
precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on
page 63 in this Section.

81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags may not activate The SRS side airbags are not generally The curtain shield airbags may not acti-
if the vehicle is subjected to a collision designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- vate if the vehicle is subjected to a
from the side at certain angles, or a volved in a front or rear collision, if it collision from the side at certain
collision to the side of the vehicle body rolls over, or if it is involved in a low- angles, or a collision to the side of the
other than the passenger compartment speed side collision. vehicle body other than the passenger
as shown in the illustration. compartment as shown in the illustra-
The SRS side airbags are designed to tion.
inflate when the passenger compartment The curtain shield airbags are designed to
area suffers a severe impact from the inflate when the passenger compartment
side. area suffers a severe impact from the
Always wear your seat belts properly. side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Hitting a curb, edge Falling into or

Collision from of pavement or jumping over
the front Collision from hard surface a deep hole
the rear

The angle of Skidding vehicle

vehicle tip- up hitting a curb
is marginal stone Pitch end over end Landing hard or vehicle falling

The curtain shield airbags may inflate The curtain shield airbags are not gen- The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
if the angle of vehicle tip- up is margin- erally designed to inflate if the vehicle may deploy if a serious impact occurs
al or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit is involved in a front or rear collision, to the underside of your vehicle. Some
a curb stone laterally as shown in the if it pitches end over end, or if it is examples are shown in the illustration.
illustration. involved in a low- speed side collision.

83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

8. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle When the airbags inflate, they produce a
switch fairly loud noise and release some smoke
9. Airbag sensor assembly and residue along with non- toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield remain inside the vehicle for some time,
airbag system is controlled by the airbag and may cause some minor irritation to
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as- the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
sembly consists of a safing sensor and wash off any residue as soon as possible
airbag sensor. to prevent any potential skin irritation with
In a severe side impact, the side and soap and water. If you can safely exit
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the from the vehicle, you should do so imme-
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the diately.
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain Deployment of the airbags happens in a
shield airbag inflators. At this time a fraction of a second, so the airbags must
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield chemical reaction in the inflators quickly inflate with considerable force. While the
airbag system consists mainly of the fol- fills the airbags with non- toxic gas to help system is designed to reduce serious inju-
lowing components, and their locations are restrain the lateral motion of the occu- ries, it may also cause minor burns or
shown in the illustration. pants. abrasions and swelling.
1. SRS warning light In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor Front seats as well as parts of the front
assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag and rear pillars, front, center and rear
2. Front passenger occupant classification
indicator light inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction garnish and roof interior may be hot for
in the inflators quickly fills the airbags several minutes, but the airbags them-
3. Curtain shield airbag modules with non- toxic gas to help restrain the selves will not be hot. The airbags are
(airbag and inflator) lateral motion of the occupants. designed to inflate only once.
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
6. Curtain shield airbag sensors
7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they in-
flate, the driver, front passenger and
rear/second passengers must:

Wear their seat belts properly.

Remain properly seated with their
backs upright and against the seats
at all times.
Improper sitting and wearing of the Type A
seat belts may not retain you inside
Do not allow anyone to lean against
the vehicle. the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with con-
siderable speed and force. Other-
wise, he/she may be killed or seri-
ously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.

Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side Type B
rail with a curtain shield airbag.

85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Make sure the “RSCA OFF” indica-

tor light is off. The curtain shield
airbags will not inflate in a vehicle
rollover if this indicator light is on
and you may be killed or seriously
injured. For details, see “Roll sens-
ing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” on page 94 in this Section.

Do not allow anyone to get his/her
Do not allow anyone to kneel on

head closer to the area where the the passenger seat, facing the pas-
side airbag and curtain shield air- senger’s side door, since the side
bag inflate, since these airbags airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken espe- Special care should be taken espe-
cially when you have a small child cially when you have a small child
in the vehicle. in the vehicle.

86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Do not allow anyone to get his/her
Do not attach a cup holder or any
Do not attach a microphone or any
head or hands out of windows other device or object on or around other device or object near the area
since the curtain shield airbags the door. When the side airbag in- where the curtain shield airbags ac-
could inflate with considerable flates, the cup holder or any other tivate such as on the windshield
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she device or object will be thrown with glass, side door glass, front, center
may be killed or seriously injured. great force or the side airbag may and roof side garnish, roof interior
Special care should be taken espe- not activate correctly, resulting in or assist grips. When the curtain
cially when you have a small child death or serious injury. Likewise, shield airbags inflate, the micro-
in the vehicle. the driver and front passenger phone or other device or object will
should not hold objects in their be hurled with great force or the
arms or on their knees. curtain shield airbags may not acti-
vate correctly, which could result in
death or serious injury.

87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Do not hook a hanger, heavy or
Do not disassemble or repair the Failure to follow these instructions
sharp pointed objects on the coat front pillars and roof side rails con- can result in death or serious injury.
hook. If the curtain shield airbag taining the curtain shield airbags. Consult your Toyota dealer about any
inflates, those items will be thrown Such changes may disable the sys- repair and modification.
away with great force or the curtain tem or cause the curtain shield air- If you wish to modify your vehicle for
shield airbag may not activate cor- bags to inflate accidentally, result- a person with physical disability, con-
rectly, resulting in death or serious ing in death or serious injury. sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-
injury. When you hang clothes,
Do not modify or change the sus- gerously interfere with the SRS side
hang them on the coat hook direct- pension system. Such changes may airbags and curtain shield airbags op-
ly. cause the curtain shield airbags to eration.

Do not use seat accessories which inflate accidentally, which could re-
cover the parts where the side air- sult in death or serious injury.
bags inflate. Such accessories may
Do not use tires or wheels other NOTICE
prevent the side airbags from acti- than the manufacturer’s recom-
vating correctly, causing death or Do not perform any of the following
mended size. Such a use may cause changes without consulting your
serious injury. the curtain shield airbags to inflate Toyota dealer. Such changes can

Do not modify or replace the seats accidentally, which could result in interfere with proper operation of the
or upholstery of the seats with side death or serious injury. For details, SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may prevent see “Checking and replacing tires” airbag system in some cases.
the side airbag system from activat- on page 384 in Section 7- 2.
ing correctly, disable the system or
Installation of electronic devices

Do not place luggage heavier than such as a mobile two- way radio,
cause the side airbags to inflate ac- specified on the roof luggage carri-
cidentally, resulting in death or seri- cassette tape player or compact
er. Such luggage may cause the disc player
ous injury. curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-
cidentally, which could result in
Modification of the side structure of
death or serious injury. For details, the passenger compartment
see “Roof luggage carrier” on page
Repairs made on or near the con-
277 in Section 1- 10. sole or front seat

88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system and indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-
ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service remind-
er indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 145 in Section 1- 6.)
This indicator comes on when the igni- If any of the following conditions occurs,
tion key is turned to the “ON” position. this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
means the SRS side airbags and curtain Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
shield airbags are operating properly.

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.
The SRS warning light will come on and
front passenger occupant classification in-
dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is
a malfunction in the front passenger occu-
pant classification system.

89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Front passenger occupant

classification system
In the following cases, contact your Toyota Your vehicle is equipped with a front
dealer as soon as possible: passenger occupant classification sys-

Any of the SRS side airbags and cur- tem. This system detects the conditions
tain shield airbags have been inflated. 1—4 in the table on page 92 and based
on these conditions activates or deacti-

The portion of the doors (shaded in the vates the following systems;
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
Front passenger airbag
the SRS side airbags and curtain
Side airbag on the front passenger
shield airbags to inflate. seat

The surface of the seats with the side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is er
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam- The system monitors the weight and
aged. load on the front passenger seat, and

The portion of the front, center and the seat belt buckle switch to determine The front passenger occupant classifi-
rear garnish, and roof interior contain- conditions 1—4. cation indicator light indicates the ac-
ing the curtain shield airbags inside tuation of the front passenger airbag,
In order for the system to detect the
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched, side airbag on the front passenger seat
conditions correctly, do not do any of
cracked, or otherwise damaged. and front passenger’s seat belt preten-
the following:
sioner.
NOTICE
Apply a heavy load to the front pas- The indicator light will indicate “OFF”
senger seat.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
Do not disconnect the battery cables
Attach a commercial seatback table, position with the condition 2 in the table
before contacting your Toyota dealer. etc. to the front passenger seatback. shown below.

Put weight on the front passenger seat
by putting your hands or feet on the
seatback from the rear passenger seat.

90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the front passenger occupant classifica- The front passenger occupant classifi-
tion system determines that a person of cation indicator light will indicate “ON”
adult size sits in the front passenger seat and “OFF” when the ignition key is
but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one turned to the “ON” position. After
of the following is likely to have occurred: about four seconds, it will go off. After

A rear passenger lifts the front passen- that, the front passenger occupant clas-
ger seat cushion with their legs. sification system operates and judges
whether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.

Objects are placed under the front pas-
senger seat.

The front passenger seatback is in
contact with the rear/second seat.
To ensure the system correctly detects an
adult sitting in the front passenger seat,
make sure the above do not occur. The SRS warning light will come on
and front passenger occupant classifi-
Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-
cation indicator light will indicate
minated when an adult is seated in the
“OFF” if there is a malfunction in the
front passenger seat. If the “OFF” indica-
front passenger occupant classification
tor is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
system.
up straight, well back in the seat, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the
“OFF” indicator still remains illuminated,
either ask the passenger to move to the
rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.

91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detected by Front Curtain shield
the front passenger Front Side airbag Front
passenger Front airbag in the
occupant classification SRS warning passenger’s on the front passenger’s
occupant passenger front
system light seat belt passenger seat belt
classification airbag passenger
reminder light seat pretensioner
indicator light side
1. Adult∗1 “ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated
2. Child∗2 or child
“OFF” Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated Activated
restraint system∗3
Not
3. Unoccupied Off Off Deactivated Deactivated
illuminated Activated
4. There is a
malfunction in the “OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated
system
∗1 : The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
∗2 : When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
∗3 : Never install a rear- facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward- facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 95 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)
∗4 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION
Do not recline the front passenger
Wear the seat belt properly.
seatback so far that it touches a
Make sure the front passenger’s
To avoid potential death or serious second seat. This may cause the seat belt tab has not been left in-
injury when the front passenger occu- “OFF” indicator to be illuminated, serted into the buckle before some-
pant classification system does not which indicates that the passen- one sits in the front passenger
detect the conditions correctly, ob- ger’s airbags will not deploy in the seat.
serve the following. event of a severe accident. If the

Do not apply a heavy load to the

Make sure the front passenger oc- seatback touches the rear/second
front passenger seat.
cupant classification indicator light seat, return the seatback to a posi-
indicates “ON” when using the seat tion where it does not touches the
Do not put weight on the front pas-
belt extender for the front passen- rear/second seat. senger seat by putting your hands
ger seat. If the indicator light indi- Keep the front passenger seatback or feet on the front passenger seat
cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend- as upright as possible when the ve- seatback from the rear/second pas-
er tongue from the seat belt buckle, senger seat.
hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-
then reconnect the seat belt. Recon- back excessively may lessen the ef-
Do not let a rear/second passenger
nect the seat belt extender after fectiveness of the seat belt system. lift the front passenger seat with
making sure the indicator light indi- their feet or press on the seatback

If an adult sits in the front passen-
cates “ON”. If you use the seat belt with their legs.
ger seat, the occupant classification
extender while the indicator light
indicator light should indicate “ON”.
Do not put objects under the front
indicates “OFF”, the front passen- passenger seat.
If the “OFF” indicator is illumina-
ger airbag and side airbag on the
front passenger side may not acti-
ted, ask the passenger to sit up
Child restraint systems installed on
straight, well back in the seat, feet the rear/second seat should not
vate correctly, which could cause
on the floor, and with the seat belt contact the front seatbacks.
death or serious injury in the event
worn correctly. If the “OFF” indica-
of collision.
tor still remains illuminated, either
ask the passenger to move to the
rear/second seat, or if that is not
possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.

93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch
When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch

When it is unavoidable to install the for a few seconds with the ignition switch
forward- facing child restraint sys- on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes
tem on the front passenger seat, on and the roll sensing function is turned
install the child restraint system on off. When you push the switch again, the
the front passenger seat in the indicator light goes off and the roll sens-
proper order. (As for the installation ing function is turned on. (For details
order, see “—Installation with seat about the roll sensing function, see
belt” on page 98 in this Section.) “—SRS side airbags and curtain shield

Do not remove the front seats. airbags” on page 80 in this Section.)

Do not kick the front passenger In a severe side impact, the curtain shield
seat or subject it to severe impact. airbags on impacted side will inflate even
Otherwise, the SRS warning light if the roll sensing function is turned off.
may come on to indicate a malfunc- (For details about the curtain shield air-
tion of the detection system. In this The roll sensing of curtain shield air- bags, see “—SRS side airbags and curtain
case, contact your Toyota dealer im- bags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch) shield airbags” on page 80 in this Sec-
mediately. can turn off the curtain shield airbags tion.)
and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt
rollover. This switch should only be pretensioners will work even if the roll
The front passenger occupant classifica-
used if inflation is not desired (such as sensing function is turned off. (For details
tion indicator light may indicate “ON” (the
extreme off- road driving). about the seat belt pretensioners, see
front passenger airbag and side airbag on
the front passenger seat may deploy) “—Seat belt pretensioners” on page 69 in
even if observing the above cautions, this Section.)
when a child sits in, or a forward- facing If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or
child restraint system is installed on the “LOCK” with the roll sensing function off
front passenger seat. Refer to all the cau- and then the ignition switch is turned back
tions in “SRS airbags” on page 73 and to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn
“Child restraint” on page 95 in this Sec- back on automatically.
tion.

94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-
CAUTION propriate child restraint systems for
Toyota strongly urges use of a
children. proper child restraint system which

Before normal driving, make sure conforms to the size of the child,
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and is put on the rear seat. Accord-
the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is
and Canada now require the use of a
off. ing to accident statistics, the child
child restraint system.

When the roll sensing function is is safer when properly restrained in
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819. the rear seat than in the front seat.
turned off (and the “RSCA OFF”
indicator light is on), the curtain If a child is too large for a child restraint
Never install a rear- facing child re-
shield airbags and seat belt preten- system, the child should sit in the rear straint system on the front passen-
sioners will not work in a vehicle seat and must be restrained using the ger seat even if the front passenger
rollover. Turning off the curtain vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on occupant classification indicator
shield airbags and seat belt preten- page 63 in this Section for details. light indicates “OFF”. In the event
sioners reduces occupant protection of an accident, the impact of the
which your vehicle safety systems CAUTION rapid inflation of the front passen-
can provide in accidents and in- ger airbag could cause death or se-
crease the likelihood of death or
For effective protection in automo- rious injury to the child if the rear-
serious injuries. bile accidents and sudden stops, a facing child restraint system is
child must be properly restrained, installed on the front passenger
using a seat belt or child restraint seat.
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an acci-
dent, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.

95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Child restraint system

A child restraint system for a small

A forward- facing child restraint sys-
Do not use the seat belt extender child or baby must itself be properly
tem should be allowed to be when installing a child restraint restrained on the seat with the lap por-
installed on the front passenger system on the front or rear passen- tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
seat only when it is unavoidable. ger seat. If installing a child re- carefully consult the manufacturer’s
Always move the seat as far back straint system with the seat belt instructions which accompany the child
as possible even if the front pas- extender connected to the seat belt, restraint system.
senger occupant classification indi- the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which To provide proper restraint, use a child
cator light indicates “OFF”, because
could cause death or serious injury restraint system following the manufactur-
the front passenger airbag could in-
flate with considerable speed and to the child or other passengers in er’s instructions about the appropriate age
the event of collision. and size of the child for the child restraint
force. Otherwise, the child may be
system.
killed or seriously injured.
Make sure you have complied with

On vehicles with side airbags and all installation instructions provided Install the child restraint system correctly
by the child restraint manufacturer following the instructions provided by its
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or and that the system is properly se- manufacturer. General directions are also
cured. If it is not secured properly, provided under the following illustrations.
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front it may cause death or serious injury The child restraint system should be
or rear pillar or roof side rail from to the child in the event of a sud- installed on the rear seat. According to
which the side airbags or curtain den stop or accident. accident statistics, the child is safer when
shield airbags deploy even if the properly restrained in the rear seat than
child is seated in the child restraint in the front seat.
system. It is dangerous if the side When not using the child restraint system,
airbag and curtain shield airbag in- keep it secured with the seat belt or place
flate, and the impact could cause it somewhere other than the passenger
death or serious injury to the child. compartment. This will prevent it from in-
juring passengers in the event of a sud-
den stop or accident.

96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Types of child restraint

system
Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-
curing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the an- (A) Infant seat (C) Booster seat
chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
page 108 in this Section.
The child restraint lower anchorages ap-
proved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint low-
er anchorages” on page 112 in this Sec-
tion.

(B) Convertible seat

97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Installation with seat belt

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

CAUTION
Do not install a child restraint sys-
An infant seat must be used in rear-
tem on the second (or third) seat if
facing position only.
Never install a rear- facing child re- it interferes with the lock mecha-
straint system on the front passen- nism of the front (or second) seats.
ger seat even if the front passenger Otherwise, the child or front (or
occupant classification indicator second) seat occupant(s) may be
light indicates “OFF”. In the event killed or seriously injured in case
of an accident, the impact of the of sudden braking or a collision.
rapid inflation of the front passen-
If the driver’s seat position does
ger airbag could cause death or se- not allow sufficient space for safe
rious injury to the child if the rear- installation, install the child re-
facing child restraint system is straint system on the rear right
installed on the front passenger seat.
seat.

98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through Contact your Toyota dealer immedi- 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
or around the infant seat following the ately. Do not install the child in the lock mode. When the belt is
instructions provided by its manufactur- restraint system on the seat until then retracted even slightly, it cannot
er and insert the tab into the buckle the seat belt is fixed. be extended.
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep To hold the infant seat securely, make
the lap portion of the belt tight. sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly 4. To remove the infant seat, press the
against the seat cushion and seatback, CAUTION buckle release button and allow the
let the shoulder belt retract as far as belt to retract completely. The belt will
it will go to hold the infant seat secure- Push and pull the child restraint sys- move freely again and be ready to
ly. tem in different directions to be sure work for an adult or older child passen-
it is secure. Follow all the installation ger.
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.

100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Install the child restraint system on the 6. While pressing the convertible seat
front passenger seat only when it is un- firmly against the seat cushion and
avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
front passenger occupant classification as far as it will go to hold the convert-
system. In order to activate the occupant ible seat securely.
classification system correctly, install the
forward- facing child restraint system on CAUTION
the front passenger seat in the following
order: Push and pull the child restraint sys-
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi- tem in different directions to be sure
tion. it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac-
2. Move the front passenger seat to the
turer.
rearward position.
(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION 3. Put the child restraint system on the
7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-
A convertible seat must be used in for- front passenger seat without putting
tem and secure the child, complying
your weight on the front passenger
ward- facing or rear- facing position de- with the instructions provided by the
seat.
pending on the age and size of the child restraint system manufacturer.
child. When installing, follow the 4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat
manufacturer’s instructions about the belt buckle.
applicable age and size of the child as 5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
well as directions for installing the in the lock mode. When the belt is
child restraint system. then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended. To hold the seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The occupant classification indicator light

should indicate “OFF” when the ignition CAUTION
key is “ON” and the child is in the child
restraint system after following these pro-
Never install a rear- facing child re-
cedures. The “OFF” indicator indicates the straint system on the front passen-
SRS front passenger airbag and side air- ger seat. A forward- facing child re-
bag on the passenger side will not deploy. straint system should only be
If the indicator light indicates “ON”, re- installed on the front passenger
move the child restraint system and rein- seat when unavoidable. If you must
stall it with the ignition key in the “ACC” install the child restraint system on
or “LOCK” position. If the indicator light the front passenger seat, put the
still indicates “ON” when the ignition key seat in its most rearward position,
is turned to the “ON” position, then the and install the forward- facing child
SRS front passenger airbag and side air- restraint system in the proper or-
bag on the passenger side may deploy in der. Otherwise, the front passenger
an accident. Do not drive the vehicle in occupant classification system can CAUTION
this condition. Remove the child restraint not detect the presence of the child
system and contact your Toyota dealer. restraint system and the front pas-
Never install a rear- facing child re-
senger airbag and side airbag on straint system on the front passen-
the front passenger seat could ger seat even if the front passenger
deploy. occupant classification indicator
light indicates “OFF”. In the event
of an accident, the impact of the
rapid inflation of the front passen-
ger airbag could cause death or se-
rious injury to the child if the rear-
facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.

102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
Move seat airbag and curtain shield airbag in-
fully back flate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

A forward- facing child restraint sys-
Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be tem on the second (or third) seat if
installed on the front passenger it interferes with the lock mecha-
seat only when it is unavoidable. nism of the front (or second) seats.
Always move the seat as far back Otherwise, the child or front (or
as possible even if the front pas- second) seat occupant(s) may be
senger occupant classification indi- killed or seriously injured in case
cator light indicates “OFF”, because of sudden braking or a collision.
the front passenger airbag could in-
flate with considerable speed and
If the driver’s seat position does
force. Otherwise, the child may be not allow sufficient space for safe
killed or seriously injured. installation, install the child re-
straint system on the rear right
seat.

103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through Contact your Toyota dealer immedi- 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
or around the convertible seat following ately. Do not install the child in the lock mode. When the belt is
the instructions provided by its restraint system on the seat until then retracted even slightly, it cannot
manufacturer and insert the tab into the seat belt is fixed. be extended.
the buckle taking care not to twist the To hold the convertible seat securely,
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt make sure the belt is in the lock mode
tight. before letting the belt retract.

104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

3. While pressing the convertible seat 4. To remove the convertible seat, press
firmly against the seat cushion and CAUTION the buckle release button and allow the
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract belt to retract completely. The belt will
as far as it will go to hold the convert- Push and pull the child restraint sys- move freely again and be ready to
ible seat securely. tem in different directions to be sure work for an adult or older child passen-
it is secure. Follow all the installation ger.
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.

105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
Move seat airbag and curtain shield airbag in-
fully back flate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
CAUTION
A booster seat must be used in for-
ward- facing position only.
A forward- facing child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the front pas-
senger occupant classification indi-
cator light indicates “OFF”, because
the front passenger airbag could in-
flate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be
killed or seriously injured.

106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION
If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

Always make sure the shoulder belt child from death or serious injury.
is positioned across the center of Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
child’s shoulder. The belt should be ately. Do not install the child
kept away from child’s neck, but restraint system on the seat until
not falling off child’s shoulder. the seat belt is fixed.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sud-
den braking or a collision.

Both high- positioned lap belts and
loose- fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run sliding under the lap belt during a
the lap and shoulder belt through or collision or other unintended event.
around the booster seat and across the Keep the lap belt positioned as low
child following the instructions provided on a child’s hips as possible.
by its manufacturer and insert the tab
For child’s safety, do not place the
into the buckle taking care not to twist shoulder belt under child’s arm.
the belt.

After inserting the tab, make sure
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly the tab and buckle are locked and
across the child’s shoulder and that the that the lap and shoulder portions
lap belt is positioned as low as possible of the belt are not twisted.
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 63 in this Section for details.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Using a top strap

(vehicles without third seats)

Anchor brackets

Symbol

2. To remove the booster seat, press the Follow the procedure below for a child Use the anchor brackets behind the rear
buckle release button and allow the restraint system that requires the use seatbacks to attach the top strap.
belt to retract. of a top strap. Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the location of the
anchor brackets.

108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET: 2. Raise the anchor bracket. 3. Fix the child restraint system with
1. Remove the head restraint. the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child re-
straint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 95 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-
straint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Using a top strap

(vehicles with third seats)

4. Replace the head restraint. Lower the anchor bracket when it is not Follow the procedure below for a child
in use. restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the sec- TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET: 2. Open the anchor bracket cover.
ond seatbacks to attach the top strap. 1. Remove the head restraint.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
second seat.
This symbol indicates the location of the
anchor brackets.

111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages
(vehicles without third seats)

3. Fix the child restraint system with 4. Replace the head restraint. Lower anchorages for the child restraint
the seat belt. Close the anchor bracket cover when the systems complying with the FMVSS225
Latch the hook onto the anchor anchor bracket is not used. or CMVSS210.2 specifications are
bracket and tighten the top strap. installed in the rear seats.

For instructions to install the child re- The anchorages are installed in the gap
straint system, see “Child restraint” on between the seat cushion and seatback of
page 95 in this Section. both outside rear seats.
Child restraint systems complying with the
CAUTION FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
Make sure the top strap is securely case, it is not necessary to fix the child
latched, and check that the child re- restraint system with a seat belt on the
straint system is secure by pushing vehicle.
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION
1. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower an-
chorages near the button on the
seatback.
2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
For owners in Canada—The symbol on
a child restraint system indicates the pres-
ence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 108 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruc-
tion manual equipped with each product.

Canada only Canada only

Type A Type B

113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages
(vehicles with third seats)

CAUTION
5th lock 1st lock
position

When using the lower anchorages position
for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular ob-
jects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat if it interferes Lower anchorages for the child restraint CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
with the lock mechanism of the systems complying with the FMVSS225 INSTALLATION
front seats. Otherwise, the child or or CMVSS210.2 specifications are 1. Fold down the seatback. Make sure
front seat occupant(s) may be killed installed in the second seats. the rear seat legs are relocked into
or seriously injured in case of sud- The anchorages are installed in the seat place (folding down the seatback will
den braking or a collision. cushion of the right side seating position disengage them) by pushing down-
and between the center and left side seat- ward on the back of the seat. Adjust
ing position. the seatback to the 1st lock position
Child restraint systems complying with the (most upright position) and then to
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification the 5th lock position.
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this Make sure the seat and seatback is
case, it is not necessary to fix the child locked securely.
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

2. Take off the cover on the seat cush-

ion.

Canada only Canada only

Type A Type B

115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

3. Widen the slits of the seat cushion

slightly and confirm the position of CAUTION
the lower anchorages near the but-
ton on the seatback.
When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, be
4. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
sure that there are no irregular ob-
straps onto the anchorages and
jects around the anchorages or that
tighten the lower straps.
the seat belt is not caught.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

Push and pull the child restraint
anchorages. system in different directions to be
For owners in Canada—The symbol on sure it is secure. Follow all the
a child restraint system indicates the pres- installation instructions provided by
ence of a lower connector system. its manufacturer.
If your child restraint system has a top
After securing the child restraint
strap, it should be anchored. (For the system, never recline the seat.
When using the left side lower an-
installation of the top strap, see “—Using

Do not install a child restraint sys- chorages for the child restraint sys-
a top strap” on page 110 in this Section.)
tem on the second seat if it inter- tem, do not sit in the center seat.
For installation details, refer to the instruc- feres with the lock mechanism of The performance of the center seat
tion manual equipped with each product. the front seats. Otherwise, the child belt cannot be brought out suffi-
or front seat occupant(s) may be ciently because the belt may be
killed or seriously injured in case high- positioned or the seat belt
of sudden braking or a collision. may be loose- fitting, posing the
risk of serious injury in the case of
collision.

116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 4
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Anti- glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Auto anti- glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rear side- view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tilt and telescopic steering

Tilt steering wheel wheel

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishan-
dle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

To change the steering wheel angle, ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL

hold the steering wheel, pull the lock TILT
release lever toward you, tilt the steer- To change the steering wheel angle,
ing wheel to the desired angle and re- hold the steering wheel, pull the lock
lease the lever. release lever toward you, tilt the steer-
When the steering wheel is in a low posi- ing wheel to the desired angle and re-
tion, it will spring up as you release the lease the lever.
lock release lever. When the steering wheel is in a low posi-
tion, it will spring up as you release the
lock release lever.

118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Outside rear view mirrors—

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishan-
dle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down or for-
ward and rearward to make sure it
is locked in position.

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC Adjust the mirror so that you can just

STEERING COLUMN see the side of your vehicle in the mir-
To change the steering wheel length, ror.
push down the lock release lever, set Be careful when judging the size or dis-
the steering wheel to the desired length tance of any object seen in the outside
and return the lever to its original posi- rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
tion. because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
On some models, when you push the
back window defogger switch, the heater
panels in the outside rear view mirrors will
quickly clear the surface. (See “Back win-
dow and outside rear view mirror defog-
gers” on page 139 in Section 1- 5.)

119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Power rear view mirror

control
On some models, the outside rear view
NOTICE
mirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clear
the driver’s rear view when it rains. (For If ice should jam the mirror, do not
details, see “Rain clearing mirrors” on operate the control or scrape the mir-
page 359 in Section 5.) ror face. Use a spray de- icer to free
the mirror.
CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious inju-
ries.

On some models, since the mirror To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
surfaces can get hot, do not touch 1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
them when the defogger switch is be adjusted
on. Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direc-
tion.
Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Anti- glare inside rear view

—Folding rear view mirrors mirror

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the ve-
hicle and an accident may occur re-
sulting in death or serious injuries.

The rear view mirrors can be folded Adjust the mirror so that you can just
backward for parking in compact areas. see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-
To fold the rear view mirror, push back- ror.
ward. To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
CAUTION driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
backward. Both the driver and pas-
The reflection in the mirror has greater
senger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted clarity at this position.
before driving. Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Auto anti- glare inside rear

view mirror
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.
To turn off the automatic function, push
the “MIRROR” switch.
To turn on the automatic function again,
push the “MIRROR” switch.
Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.
When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
Adjust the mirror so that you can just darken in response to the detection of To ensure correct functioning of anti-
see the rear of your vehicle in the mir- headlights. glare mirror sensors located on both
ror. sides of the mirror, do not touch or
This mirror is equipped with auto anti- CAUTION cover the sensors with your finger or
glare function. The function is designed a piece of cloth, etc.
to reduce glare from the headlights of Do not adjust the mirror while the
the vehicle behind you during night vehicle is moving. Doing so may
driving. cause the driver to mishandle the ve-
When the ignition key is inserted and hicle and an accident may occur re-
turned on, the inside rear view mirror al- sulting in death or serious injuries.
ways turns on in the automatic function
mode.
The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.

122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear side- view mirrors Sun visors—

Rear side- view mirrors are useful as a
secondary means of checking the area
to the rear of the vehicle.
Carefully check the area to the rear of the
vehicle by either looking directly or using
both outside and inside rear view mirrors.

Type A

Type B

123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

CAUTION
To block out glare from the front—Swing
down the main sun visor (position 1).

Type A—Do not extend the plate at
To block out glare from the side—Swing the end of the sun visor when the
down the main sun visor, remove it from visor is in the position 1. It can
the hook and swing it to the lateral side cover the anti- glare inside rear
(position 2). view mirror and obstruct the rear
Type A—If glare comes from obliquely be- view.
hind you, extend the plate at the end of
Type B—Slide the main sun visor
the visor (to position 3). only when it is swung down to the
Type B—If glare comes from obliquely be- lateral side. It can cover the anti-
hind you, slide the main sun visor back- glare inside rear view mirror and
ward (to position 3). obstruct the rear view.
To block the glare from the front when the
main sun visor is swung to the lateral
side, swing down the sub visor.

124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Vanity mirrors
To use the vanity mirrors, swing down
the main sun visor and slide the cover.
Type A—
The vanity light comes on when you slide
the cover.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when
the key is removed for 30 minutes or
more.

Type A

Type B

125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 5
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Running board lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Back window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . . 139

127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Headlights and turn signals

(with automatic light control
system)
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
For Canada—The tail light indicator (green
light) on the instrument panel will tell you
that the tail lights are on.
Position 2—Headlights and all of the
above
For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beam
indicator light (green light) on the instru-
For the U.S.A. ment panel will tell you that the low
The automatic light control sensor is on
beams are on.
the top of the driver’s side instrument
Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all panel.
of the lights in position 1
Do not place anything on the instrument
They automatically turn on or off depend- panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
ing on the darkness of the surroundings. windshield to block this sensor.
Manually twist the knob to the position 2 The operating condition or sensitivity can
to turn on the headlights if they are need- be changed. For details, contact your
ed immediately when entering a dark tun- Toyota dealer.
nel, parking structure, etc.
Automatic light cut off system
Position 1 or position 3 with the tail
lights on—
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
For Canada key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on— Daytime running light (DRL) system (all
The lights automatically turn off after 30 models sold in Canada and some mod-
seconds when all the side doors and back els sold in U.S.A.)
door are closed with the ignition key in The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. can make it easier for others to see the
If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re- front of your vehicle during the day. The
mote control transmitter is pushed twice DRL system can be helpful in many differ-
simultaneously, the lights automatically ent driving conditions, but they can be
turn off immediately. especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset.
The time before the headlights turn off
can be changed. For details, contact your The DRL system will make your front turn
Toyota dealer. signal lights come on when:
If the driver’s door is kept open, the lights
The ignition is on with the engine run-
automatically turn off after 30 minutes. ning. High- Low beams—For high beams, turn
To turn them on again, turn the key to the
The knob is in the “OFF” position, the headlights on and push the lever away
position 1 or position 3 with the tail from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-
“ON” position or actuate the headlight ward you (position 2) for low beams.
switch. lights on.
If you are going to park for over one
The parking brake is released. The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
week, make sure the headlight switch is To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob tell you that the high beams are on.
off. to position 2 or position 3 with the head-
lights on, or turn the ignition switch off. Flashing the high beam headlights
NOTICE (position 3)—Pull the lever all the way
This DRL system can be disabled. For back. The high beam headlights turn off
To prevent the battery from being dis- details, contact your Toyota dealer.
when you release the lever.
charged, do not leave the lights on
You can flash the high beam headlights
for a long period when the engine is
with the knob turned to “OFF”.
not running.

129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Headlights and turn signals

(without automatic light
control system)
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.

For the U.S.A.

TURN SIGNALS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
On some models, the front turn signal
lights are on during daytime running light
system is on. For details, see “Daytime
running light system”. For Canada

130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

HEADLIGHTS The time before the headlights turn off Daytime running light (DRL) system (all
To turn on the following lights: Twist can be changed. For details, contact your models sold in Canada and some mod-
the headlight/turn signal lever knob. Toyota dealer. els sold in U.S.A.)

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate, If the driver’s door is kept open, the lights The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
side marker and instrument panel lights automatically turn off after 30 minutes. can make it easier for others to see the
To turn them on again, turn the key to the front of your vehicle during the day. The
For Canada—The tail light indicator (green DRL system can be helpful in many differ-
light) on the instrument panel will tell you “ON” position or actuate the headlight
switch. ent driving conditions, but they can be
that the tail lights are on. especially helpful in the short periods after
Position 2—Headlights and all of the If you are going to park for over one dawn and before sunset.
above week, make sure the headlight switch is
off. The DRL system will make your front turn
For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beam signal lights come on when:
indicator light (green light) on the instru- NOTICE
The ignition is on with the engine run-
ment panel will tell you that the low ning.
beams are on. To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on
The knob is in the “OFF” position or
Automatic light cut off system
for a long period when the engine is position 1.
Position 1— not running.
The parking brake is released.
The lights automatically turn off when the
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
to position 2 or turn the ignition switch off.
key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
This DRL system can be disabled. For
Position 2—
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when all the side doors and back
door are closed with the ignition key in
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-
mote control transmitter is pushed twice
simultaneously, the lights automatically
turn off immediately.
131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.

High- Low beams—For high beams, turn TURN SIGNALS

the headlights on and push the lever away To signal a turn, push the headlight/
from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- turn signal lever up or down to position
ward you (position 2) for low beams. 1.
The headlight high beam indicator light The key must be in the “ON” position.
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on. The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
Flashing the high beam headlights it by hand after you change lanes.
(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way
back. The high beam headlights turn off To signal a lane change, move the lever
when you release the lever. up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”. On some models, the front turn signal
lights are on during daytime running light
system is on. For details, see “Daytime
running light system”.

132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the en-
gine is not running.

To turn on the emergency flashers, To adjust the brightness of the instru-

push the switch. ment panel lights, turn the dial.
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as pos-
sible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operat-
ing.

133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Front fog lights Interior light

To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the side doors and back door is opened.
The light goes off when all the side doors
and back door are closed.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
Door linked operation—When the switch is
Without rear seat audio system
To turn on the front fog lights, twist in the “DOOR” position and any of the
the band of the headlight and turn sig- side doors and back door is opened, the
nal switch lever. They will come on light will come on. After all the side doors
only when the headlights are on low and back door are closed, the light re-
beam. mains on for about 15 seconds before
fading out.
Ignition switch linked operation—When the
switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the
ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the
light will come on. The light remains on
for about 15 seconds before fading out.
However, in the following cases, the light
goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are
With rear seat audio system closed when the ignition key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.

134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Personal lights Luggage compartment light

All the side doors and back door are
closed and locked.
When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked using either the key or
the wireless remote control transmitter, the
light will come on and remain on for about
15 seconds before fading out.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless
remote control transmitter linked opera-
tion

Changing the duration of lighting To turn on the personal lights, push the To turn on the luggage compartment
lens. To turn the lights off, push the light, slide the switch.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
lens once again. The luggage compartment light switch has
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left the following positions:
opened with the switch at the “DOOR” “ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
position for 30 minutes or more. “OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the side doors and back door is opened.
The light goes off when all the side doors
and back door are closed.

135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Ignition switch light

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
Cancelling the door key or the wireless
Door linked operation—When the switch is remote control transmitter linked opera-
in the “DOOR” position and any of the tion
side doors and back door is opened, the
Changing the duration of lighting
light will come on. After all the side doors To prevent the battery being discharged,
and back door are closed, the light re- the lights will automatically turn off when
mains on for about 15 seconds before the key is removed and the door is left
fading out. opened with the switch at the “DOOR”
Ignition switch linked operation—When the position for 30 minutes or more.
switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the
ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the
light will come on. The light remains on
for about 15 seconds before fading out.
However, in the following cases, the light For easy access to the ignition switch,
goes off immediately. the ignition switch light comes on when

All the side doors and back door are any of the side doors and back door is
closed when the ignition key is in the opened or when the ignition switch is
“ACC” or “ON” position. turned to the “LOCK” position.

All the side doors and back door are The light remains on for about 15 seconds
closed and locked. after all the side doors and back door are
closed.
When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked using either the key or However, in the following cases, the light
the wireless remote control transmitter, the goes off immediately.
light will come on and remain on for about
All the side doors and back door are
15 seconds before fading out. closed when the ignition key is in the
The following adjustments can be made in “ACC” or “ON” position.
this system. For details, contact your
All the side doors and back door are
Toyota dealer. closed and locked.

136

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Running board lights

When any of the side doors and back When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked using either the key or door is unlocked using either the key or
the wireless remote control transmitter, the the wireless remote control transmitter, the
light will come on and remain on for about lights will come on and remain on for
15 seconds before fading out. about 15 seconds before fading out.
The following adjustments can be made in To prevent the battery being discharged,
this system. For details, contact your the light will automatically turn off when
Toyota dealer. the key is removed and the door is left

Cancelling the door key or the wireless opened for 30 minutes or more.
remote control transmitter linked opera-
tion

Changing the duration of lighting
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when Lighting the running boards and the
the key is removed and the door is left ground helps you easily to get in and
opened for 30 minutes or more. out of the vehicle in the night. The
lights come on when any of the side
doors is opened.
The lights remain on for about 15 seconds
after all the side doors are closed.
However, in the following cases, the light
go off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are
closed and locked.

The vehicle speed reaches 8 km/h (5
mph) or higher.

137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Back window wiper and

Windshield wipers and washer washer
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 393 in
Section 7- 3.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.
To turn on the windshield wipers, move To turn on the back window wiper, twist
the lever to the desired setting. NOTICE the lever knob upward.
The key must be in the “ON” position. Do not operate the wipers if the wind- The key must be in the “ON” position.
shield is dry. It may scratch the
Lever position Speed setting Lever position Speed setting
glass.
Position 1 Intermittent Position 1 Intermittent
Position 2 Slow Position 2 Normal
Position 3 Fast To squirt washer fluid on the back window,
twist the knob upward or downward as far
The “INT” band lets you adjust the wiping
as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
time interval when the wiper lever is in
automatically returns from these positions
the intermittent position (position 1). Twist
after you release it. The back window wip-
the band upward to increase the time be-
er operates while the washer squirts.
tween sweeps, and downward to decrease
it. For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 393 in
Section 7- 3.
138

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Back window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers
If the back window is not fully closed, the If the back window is not fully closed, the
back window wiper and washer will not back window defogger will not work. Make
work. Make sure the back window is fully sure the back window is fully closed when
closed when using the back window wiper using the back window defogger.
and washer. If the back window is opened while the
defogger is working, the defogger will au-
NOTICE
tomatically turn off. Even if the back win-
Do not operate the back window wip- dow is fully closed after that, the defogger
er if the back window is dry. It may will not automatically turn on.
scratch the glass. Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop- and- go driving. The defoggers are
To defog or defrost the back window,
push the switch with the back window not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
closed.
The key must be in the “ON” position. CAUTION
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
back window will quickly clear the surface. On some models, since the mirror
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate surfaces can get hot, do not touch
the defogger is operating. them when the defogger switch is on.
On some models, heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will also quickly
clear the surfaces.
NOTICE
Push the switch once again to turn the When cleaning the inside of the back
defoggers off. window, be careful not to scratch or
The system will automatically shut off af-
damage the heater wires or connec-
tors.
ter the defoggers have operated about 15
minutes.
139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 6
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Engine coolant temperature

Fuel gauge gauge
On inclines or curves, due to the move-
ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
Low fuel level
soon as possible.
warning light

The gauge indicates the approximate The gauge indicates the engine coolant
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank temperature when the ignition switch is
when the ignition switch is on. on. The engine operating temperature
Nearly full—Needle at “F” will vary with changes in weather and
Nearly empty—Needle at “E” engine load.

It is a good idea to keep the tank over If the needle moves into the red zone,
1/4 full. your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
The needle moves when braking, acceler- engine to cool.
ating or making turns. This is caused by
the movement of the fuel in the tank. Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
fuel tank as soon as possible.
Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.

142

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tachometer

Idling for a long period with the air
NOTICE
conditioning on in stop- and- go traffic.

Towing a trailer. Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
NOTICE severe engine damage.

Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to con-
trol the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.

Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your ve- The tachometer indicates engine speed
hicle overheats” on page 334 in in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
Section 4. minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent en-
gine lugging and over- revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.

143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Odometer and two trip meters

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-
trical power source is disconnected.
3. Odometer/two trip meter changeover
button—Switches the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the changeover but-
ton. The meter display changes in the
order from the odometer to trip meter
A to trip meter B, then back to the
odometer each time you push.
4. Trip meter reset button—Resets the
two trip meters to zero.
To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-
play the meter A reading, then push
and hold the button until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(indicator and buzzer)

(b) Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(indicator and buzzer)

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) Replace engine oil.

or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop
(i) immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all side doors and back door.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Stop and check.

(four- wheel drive models)

(n) Adjust tire pressure. If the light remains, contact Toyota dealer.

146

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(o) Add washer fluid.

(p) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and Have your vehicle checked at your
Buzzer Toyota dealer in the following cases:
The brake system warning light re-
mains on together with the “ABS”
This light comes on in the following cases
The light does not come on even if the warning light.
when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi- parking brake is applied when the igni-
tion. tion key is in the “ON” position. In this case, not only the anti- lock
brake system will fail but also the

When the parking brake is applied...
The light does not come on even if the vehicle will become extremely un-
This light comes on for a few seconds ignition key is turned on with the park- stable during braking.
when the ignition key is turned to the ing brake released.
“ON” position on even after the parking A warning light turning on briefly during
Any of the following conditions may oc-
brake is released. operation does not indicate a problem.
cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-

When the brake fluid level is low... tion:
CAUTION

The light may stay on for about 60
CAUTION seconds after the ignition key is turned
If any of the following conditions oc-
curs, immediately stop your vehicle at to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
It is dangerous to continue driving turns off after a while.
normally when the brake fluid level is a safe place and contact your Toyota
low. dealer.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

The light does not turn off even may turn on the warning light and
after the parking brake is released buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off

When the hydraulic brake booster and the buzzer stops sounding after a
fails... while the engine is running.
few seconds.

The warning buzzer comes on to-
If the hydraulic booster causes a problem
gether with the warning light.
You may hear a small sound in the
resulting in poor braking performance, the engine compartment after the engine is
warning light comes on and buzzer sounds In either case, this can indicate that started or the brake pedal is depressed
continuously. the brakes may not work properly repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating
and your stopping distance will be- sound of the brake system, and it is
come longer. Depress the brake not a malfunction.
pedal firmly and bring the vehicle
to an immediate stop.

148

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light (d) Discharge Warning Light (e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
and Buzzer This light warns that the battery is being Light
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to discharged. This light warns that the engine oil pres-
buckle up the driver’s seat belt. If it comes on while you are driving, there sure is too low.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or is a problem somewhere in the charging If it flickers or stays on while you are
“START”, the reminder light flashes and system. driving, pull off the road to a safe place
buzzer come on if the driver’s seat belt The engine ignition will continue to oper- and stop the engine immediately. Call a
is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens ate, however, until the battery is dis- Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
the belt, the light continues flashing and charged. Turn off the air conditioning, assistance.
the buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 se- blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to The light may occasionally flicker when
conds. the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop. the engine is idling or it may come on
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt briefly after a hard stop. There is no
Reminder Light NOTICE cause for concern if it then goes out when
The light acts as a reminder to have the the engine is accelerated slightly.
Do not continue driving if the engine
front passenger buckle up the seat belt. drive belt is broken or loose. The light may come on when the oil level
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or is extremely low. It is not designed to
“START”, the reminder light flashes if a indicate low oil level, and the oil level
passenger sits in the front passenger seat must be checked using the level dipstick.
and does not fasten the seat belt.
NOTICE
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its Do not drive the vehicle with the
weight, the reminder light may flash. warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.

149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as Emissions inspection and maintenance
This lamp comes on when the ignition possible to service the vehicle. (I/M) programs
key is turned to the “ON” position and If engine speed does not increase when Your vehicle may not pass a state
goes off after the engine starts. This the accelerator pedal is depressed, there emission inspection if the malfunction
means that the warning light system is may be a problem somewhere in the elec- indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
operating properly. tronic throttle control system. Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- emission control system and OBD
comes on while driving, first check the er, if you depress the accelerator pedal (On- Board Diagnostics) system before
followings. more firmly and slowly, you can drive your taking your vehicle for the inspection.

Empty fuel tank vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 366
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi- possible. in Section 6.
ately.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic (g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Loose fuel tank cap throttle control system is corrected during This light comes on when the fuel level
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely low speed driving, the system may not be in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
tighten it. recovered until the engine is stopped and the tank as soon as possible.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position. On inclines or curves, due to the move-
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
after taking several driving trips. warning light may come on earlier than
CAUTION
If the lamp does not go off even after usual.
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
Be especially careful to prevent erro-
as soon as possible.
neous pedal operation.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in the
engine, emission control system, elec-
tronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warn-
ing light system itself.

150

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(h) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder You need to reset the light after the en- When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) gine oil replacement. Reset the light by the brake system warning light is off), the
This light acts as a reminder to replace following the procedure below: following systems do not operate, but the
the engine oil. 1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or brake system still operates conventionally.
This light will come on when the ignition “LOCK” position with the odometer
Anti- lock brake system
key is turned to “ON” and will go off after reading shown. (For details, see
Brake assist system
“Odometer and two trip meters” on
about a few seconds.
page 144 in this Section.)
Traction control system
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500 (two- wheel drive models)
2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
tion while holding down the trip meter
Active traction control system
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds (four- wheel drive models)
and then flashes for about 12 seconds reset button.
with the ignition key turned to the “ON” Hold down the button until the light goes
Vehicle stability control system
position. If you continue driving without off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates
“AUTO LSD” system
the engine oil replacement, and if the driv- for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and (two- wheel drive models)
ing range exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), illuminates for 1 second.
Downhill assist control system
the light will come on after the ignition If the system fails to reset, the light will (four- wheel drive models)
key is turned to the “ON” position. The
light will remain on thereafter.
remain flashing.
Hill- start assist control system
(i) “ABS” Warning Light When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early The light comes on when the ignition key the brake system warning light is off), the
opportunity depending on the driving and is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti- anti- lock brake system does not operate,
road condition. If the light comes on, re- lock brake system and the brake assist so that the wheels will lock up during a
place it as soon as possible. system work properly, the light turns off sudden braking or braking on slippery
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either road surfaces.
of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.

151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If either of the following conditions oc- Either of the following conditions may It is not a malfunction that the warning
curs, this indicates a malfunction some- occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
where in the components monitored by tion: ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
the warning light system. Contact your
The light may stay on for about 60 Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to seconds after the ignition key is turned may turn on the lights. It is normal if they
service the vehicle. to the “ON” position. It is normal if it go out after a few seconds.

The light does not come on when the turns off after a while. If the light comes on while driving, the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly above mentioned systems do not work.
tion, or remains on. may turn on the light. It is normal if it However, as conventional braking operates

The light comes on while you are dri- turns off after a few seconds. when applied, there is no problem to con-
ving. (j) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light tinue your driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during The light warns that there is a problem In the following cases, contact your Toyota
operation does not indicate a problem. somewhere in the following. dealer:

Vehicle stability control system
The warning light does not come on
CAUTION after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Traction control system
If the “ABS” warning light remains on (two- wheel drive models)
The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
together with the brake system warn-
Active traction control system
ing light, immediately stop your ve- (four- wheel drive models)
The warning light comes on while driv-
hicle at a safe place and contact your ing.
Toyota dealer.

“AUTO LSD” system
(two- wheel drive models) When the brake fluid level is too low, the
In this case, not only the anti- lock above mentioned systems will not operate
brake system will fail but also the
Downhill assist control system and the warning light comes on.
(four- wheel drive models)
vehicle will become extremely unsta- (k) Open Door Warning Light
ble during braking.
Hill- start assist control system
This light remains on until all the side
The light will come on when the ignition doors and back door are completely
key turned to “ON”, and will go off after closed.
a few seconds.

152

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(l) SRS Warning Light (m) Automatic Transmission Fluid (n) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light will come on when the igni- Temperature Warning Light This light warns that the tire pressure of
tion key is turned to the “ON” position. (four- wheel drive models) one or more of your tires (including the
After about 6 seconds, the light will go This light warns that the automatic trans- spare tire) is low. The light comes on
off. This means the system of the air- mission fluid temperature is too high. when the ignition key is turned to the
bag and front seat belt pretensioner are If this light comes on while you are driv- “ON” position. It goes off after a few sec-
operating properly. ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop onds. This indicates that the tire pressure
This warning light system monitors the the vehicle at a safe place and put the warning system is functioning properly.
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- selector lever in “P”. With the engine id- If the warning light comes on, stop your
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- ling, wait until the light goes off. If the vehicle in a safe place as soon as pos-
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- light goes off, you may start the vehicle sible and check that the inflation pressure
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt again. If the light does not go off, call a of all tires (including the spare tire) is as
buckle switch, front passenger occupant Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for specified on the tire and loading informa-
classification system and indicator light, assistance. tion label. (See “Checking tire inflation
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, pressure” on page 381 in Section 7- 2.)
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat- NOTICE The light should go off a few minutes after
ors, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator the tire pressure is adjusted.
Continued driving with the warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power If the warning light blinks, the tire pres-
light on may damage the automatic
sources. sure warning system may be malfunction-
transmission.
If either of the following conditions occurs, ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.
this indicates a malfunction somewhere in For details, see “Tire pressure warning
the parts monitored by the warning light system” on page 188 in Section 1- 7.
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or flashes while
driving.
153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(o) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER
Slip indicator light
Warning Light (for vehicles sold in INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
Height control indicator lights
Canada) warning light and low windshield
washer fluid level warning light)
Downhill assist control system indicator
The light warns that the windshield washer light (four- wheel drive models)
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at 1. Apply the parking brake.
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
Height control “OFF” indicator light
2. Open one of the side doors or back
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 393 in door. The SRS warning light goes off after
Section 7- 3.) The open door warning light should about 6 seconds.
(p) Key Reminder Buzzer come on. There may be the case that the “ABS”
This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove 3. Close the door. warning light (brake assist system
the key when you open the driver’s door The open door warning light should go warning light), “VSC TRAC” warning
with the ignition key in the “ACC” or off. light and “AUTO LSD” (two- wheel drive
“LOCK” position. models), “VSC OFF” (four- wheel drive
4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but do models) or slip indicator light stay on
not start the engine. for about 60 seconds after the ignition
All the service reminder indicators ex- key is turned to the “ON” position. It
cept the open door warning light should is normal if they go out after a while.
come on.
If any service reminder indicator or warn-
The following service reminder indica- ing buzzer does not function as described
tors go off after a few seconds: above, have it checked by your Toyota

Engine oil replacement reminder light dealer as soon as possible.

“ABS” warning light

“VSC TRAC” warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

“RSCA OFF” indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light
(two- wheel drive models)

“VSC OFF” indicator light
(four- wheel drive models)
154

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 7
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Four- wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Active traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
”AUTO LSD” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Downhill assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Hill- start assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rear height control air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Ignition switch
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories Approximately five hours after the engine
on. is turned off, you may hear sound coming
This is the normal driving position. from underneath the luggage compartment
for several minutes. This is normal opera-
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio tion and does not indicate a malfunction.
operate, but the engine is off. (See “Leak detection pump” on page x.)
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or It is not a malfunction if the needles on
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s all meters and gauges move slightly when
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or
the key. “START” position.
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be re- NOTICE
moved only at this position.
Do not leave the key in the “ON”
You must push in the key to turn it from position if the engine is not running.
“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec- The battery will discharge and the
tor lever must be in the “P” position be- ignition could be damaged.
released.
fore pushing the key.
For starting tips, see page 309 in Section
Once you remove the key, the engine im-
3.
mobilizer system is automatically set. (See
“Engine immobilizer system” on page 14
in Section 1- 2.)
When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

156

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Automatic transmission
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key
removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
(shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Engine braking
(shifting into overdrive not possible)
3, 2: Stronger engine braking
With the brake pedal depressed L: Maximum engine braking
(The ignition switch must be in
“ON” position.)

Shift normally.

157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(b) Normal driving 2. With your foot holding down the brake Vehicles with multi- mode control—
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. Always use the “D” position for better fuel
to start the engine” on page 310 in When the lever is in the “D” position, the economy and quieter driving. If the engine
Section 3. The transmission must be in automatic transmission system will select coolant temperature is low or when the
“P” or “N”. the most suitable gear for running condi- multi- mode control switch knob is in “L4”
Vehicles with four- wheel drive control— tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- (low- speed position, four- wheel drive,
ing, hard towing, etc. center differential locked), the transmission
When the four- wheel drive control switch will not shift into the overdrive gear even
knob is in “L4” (low- speed position, center Vehicles with four- wheel drive control—
in the “D” position. (See “Four- wheel drive
differential locked), the driving pattern se- Always use the “D” position for better fuel system (multi- mode four- wheel drive mod-
lector setting has no effect on gear shift economy and quieter driving. If the engine els)” on page 165 in this Section for in-
timing. (See “Four- wheel drive system coolant temperature is low or when the formation of the multi- mode control.)
(full- time four- wheel drive models)” on four- wheel drive control switch knob is in
page 162 in this Section for information of “L4” (low- speed position, center differential
CAUTION
the four- wheel drive control.) locked), the transmission will not shift into
Vehicles with multi- mode control— the overdrive gear even in the “D” posi- Never put your foot on the accelera-
tion. (See “Four- wheel drive system (full-
When the multi- mode control switch knob tor pedal while shifting.
time four- wheel drive models)” on page
is in “L4” (low- speed position, four- wheel 162 in this Section for information of the
drive, center differential locked), the driv- four- wheel drive control.) 3. Release the parking brake and brake
ing pattern selector setting has no effect pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
on gear shift timing. (See “Four- wheel slowly for smooth starting.
drive system (multi- mode four- wheel drive
If the automatic locking operation linked
models)” on page 165 in this Section for with the shift position is set, all the side
information of the multi- mode control.) doors and back door are automatically
locked when the shift lever is moved out
of the “P” position with the engine running
and all the side doors and back door are
closed. For details, see “—Automatic door
locking and unlocking functions” on page
25 in Section 1- 2.

158

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(c) Using engine braking 2UZ- FE engine 2UZ- FE engine

To use engine braking, you can downshift Four- wheel drive control switch Four- wheel drive control switch
the transmission as follows: knob at “H4” knob at “H4”

Shift into the “4” position. The trans- 139 km/h (86 mph) 92 km/h (57 mph)
mission will downshift to fourth gear Four- wheel drive control switch Four- wheel drive control switch
and engine braking will be enabled. knob at “L4” knob at “L4”

Shift into the “3” position. The trans- 54 km/h (34 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
mission will downshift to third gear
Shift into the “2” position. The trans-
Shift into the “L” position. The trans-
when the vehicle speed drops down to mission will downshift to second gear mission will downshift to first gear
or lower than the following speed, and when the vehicle speed drops down to when the vehicle speed drops down to
stronger engine braking will be en- or lower than the following speed, and or lower than the following speed, and
abled. stronger engine braking will be en- maximum engine braking will be en-
Two- wheel drive models abled. abled.

1GR- FE engine Two- wheel drive models Two- wheel drive models
133 km/h (83 mph) 1GR- FE engine 1GR- FE engine
2UZ- FE engine 88 km/h (54 mph) 42 km/h (26 mph)
139 km/h (86 mph) 2UZ- FE engine 2UZ- FE engine
Four- wheel drive models 92 km/h (57 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph)

1GR- FE engine Four- wheel drive models Four- wheel drive models

Multi- mode control switch knob 1GR- FE engine 1GR- FE engine

at “H2” and “H4” Multi- mode control switch knob Multi- mode control switch knob
133 km/h (83 mph) at “H2” and “H4” at “H2” and “H4”
Multi- mode control switch knob 88 km/h (54 mph) 42 km/h (26 mph)
at “L4” Multi- mode control switch knob Multi- mode control switch knob
51 km/h (31 mph) at “L4” at “L4”
34 km/h (21 mph) 16 km/h (9 mph)

159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

2UZ- FE engine (d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

NOTICE
Four- wheel drive control switch The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for
knob at “H4” strong engine braking as described pre-
Be careful not to over- rev the en-
40 km/h (25 mph) viously. gine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
Four- wheel drive control switch With the selector lever in ”3”, “2” or “L”,
zone. The approximate maximum al-
knob at “L4” you can start the vehicle in motion as
lowable speed for each position is
15 km/h (9 mph) with the lever in “D”.
given below for your reference:
When the cruise control is being used, With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the
Two- wheel drive models
even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, vehicle will start in first gear and automat-
engine braking will not be enabled be- ically shift to third gear or second gear. 1GR- FE engine
cause the cruise control is not cancelled. “3” . . . . . . . 146 km/h (90 mph)
With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-
“2” . . . . . . . 100 km/h (62 mph)
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, mission is engaged in first gear.
“L” . . . . . . . . 58 km/h (36 mph)
see “Cruise control” on page 193 in this
Section. 2UZ- FE engine
“3” . . . . . . . 146 km/h (90 mph)
CAUTION “2” . . . . . . . 100 km/h (62 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 58 km/h (36 mph)
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery surface. Abrupt shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.

160

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(f) Parking
Four- wheel drive models
Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
1GR- FE engine
“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may 2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
Multi- mode drive control cause severe automatic transmis- fully depress the parking brake pedal
switch knob at “H2” or “H4” sion damage from overheating. To to apply the parking brake securely.
“3” . . . . . 146 km/h (90 mph) prevent such damage, “4” position
“2” . . . . . 100 km/h (62 mph) 3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
should be used in hill climbing or shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
“L” . . . . . . 58 km/h (36 mph) hard towing. tion.
Multi- mode drive control
switch knob at “L4” (e) Backing up CAUTION
“3” . . . . . . 57 km/h (35 mph)
“2” . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph) 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
Never attempt to move the selector
“L” . . . . . . 22 km/h (14 mph) 2. With the brake pedal held down with
lever into “P” position under any cir-
2UZ- FE engine your foot, shift the selector lever to the
cumstances while the vehicle is mov-
“R” position.
Four- wheel drive control ing. Serious mechanical damage and
switch knob at “H4” NOTICE loss of vehicle control may result.
“3” . . . . . 146 km/h (90 mph)
“2” . . . . . 100 km/h (62 mph) Never shift into reverse while the ve- If the automatic unlocking operation linked
“L” . . . . . . 58 km/h (36 mph) hicle is moving. with the shift position is set, all the side
Four- wheel drive control doors and back door are automatically un-
switch knob at “L4” Vehicles with rear view monitor system— locked when the selector lever is moved
“3” . . . . . . 57 km/h (35 mph) When the selector lever is shifted into “R” to the “P” position with the ignition switch
“2” . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph) position with the ignition switch in the is in the “ON” position. For details, see
“L” . . . . . . 26 km/h (16 mph) “ON” position, rear view monitor system “—Automatic door locking and unlocking
will activate. For instructions, see “Rear functions” on page 25 in Section 1- 2.
view monitor system” on page 254 in Sec-
tion 1- 10.

161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Four- wheel drive system (full- time

four- wheel drive models)—
(a) Four- wheel drive control
(g) Good driving practice (h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up ver out of “P” position
and down between fourth gear and If you cannot shift the selector lever from
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope, the “P” position even though the brake
shift the selector lever to the “4” posi- pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever override button. For instructions, see “If
to the “D” position immediately after- you cannot shift automatic transmission
ward. selector lever” on page 350 in Section 4.

When towing a trailer, in order to main-
tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use “D” position.

CAUTION
Four- wheel drive control switch knob
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
al, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

Center differential lock switch

162

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Use the four- wheel drive control switch “L4” (low speed position, center differ-
NOTICE
knob and center differential lock switch ential unlocked): Four- wheel drive control
to select the transfer and center differ- As soon as the center differential lock switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock
ential modes. switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF” switch left out
The “H4” and “L4” positions of the four- indicator light comes on. After the The “4LO” (low speed four- wheel drive)
wheel drive control switch knob provide wheels are out of the ditch or off the indicator light comes on when the “L4”
either lock or unlock mode of the center slippery or bumpy surface, turn the mode is selected.
differential depending on the center differ- center differential lock switch off.
Use this for maximum power and traction.
ential lock switch position. Make sure that the center differential
Use this for climbing or descending steep
lock indicator light and vehicle stabil-
Use the center differential lock system if hills, off- road driving, and hard pulling in
ity control system off indicator light
your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when sand or mud.
turn off.
you are driving on a slippery or bumpy In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-
surface. When the center differential is curs when the wheels are negotiating a
locked, the vehicle stability control system “H4” (high speed position, center differ-
sharp corner is further reduced than in the
is automatically turned off and the center ential unlocked): Four- wheel drive control
“L4” (low position, center differential
differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator switch knob at “H4”, center differential
locked) mode.
lights come on because the function that lock switch left out
controls engine performance interferes “L4” (low speed position, center differ-
Use this for normal driving on all types of
with the process of freeing your wheels. ential locked): Four- wheel drive control
roads, from dry hard- surfaced roads to
switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock
wet, icy or snow- covered roads. This
switch pushed in
position gives greater economy, quietest
ride, least wear and better vehicle control. The “4LO” (low speed four- wheel drive)
indicator light comes on when the “L4”
“H4” (high speed position, center differ-
mode is selected.
ential locked): Four- wheel drive control
switch knob at “H4”, center differential
lock switch pushed in
Use this for greater traction when you
experience a loss of power, such as
wheel slipping, in the center differential
unlock mode.

163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(b) Shifting procedure

Use this for maximum power and traction. SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED) If the “4LO” (low speed four- wheel drive)
Use this for hard pulling in situations the AND “H4” (LOCKED) indicator light continues to blink when you
vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4” To shift between unlock and lock operate the four- wheel drive control
(low speed position, center differential un- modes in “H4”, push the center differen- switch knob to the “H4” or “L4” position,
locked) mode. Also, using this mode when tial lock switch. drive forward or backward in a short dis-
driving down steep off- road inclines will tance, then stop the vehicle completely,
help contribute to increased vehicle stabil- SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED) shift the automatic transmission selector
ity. AND “L4” (LOCKED) lever securely into “N” and operate the
The indicator light tells when the differen- To shift between unlock and lock switch knob again.
tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ- modes in “L4”, push the center differen- If the indicator continues to blink even if
ential is not still locked as long as the tial lock switch. doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as
indicator light remains off. SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4” soon as possible. There may be a trouble
When the operation is not completed, the To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the in the four- wheel drive system.
indicator blinks. If the indicator light does vehicle to a complete stop with the brake
not go off when you push out the center pedal held down with your foot, shift the CAUTION
differential lock switch, drive straight automatic transmission selector lever into
ahead while accelerating or decelerating, “N” and push and turn the four- wheel Never operate the four- wheel drive
or drive in reverse. drive control switch knob fully clockwise. control switch knob if the wheels are
slipping. Stop the slipping or spin-
If the center differential lock system op- To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the ning before operating.
eration is not completed within 5 seconds vehicle to a complete stop with the brake
while the cruise control system is set, pedal held down with your foot, shift the
cancel the cruise control system. To can- automatic transmission selector lever into
cel the cruise control system, see “Cruise “N” and turn the four- wheel drive control
control” on page 193 in Section 1- 7. switch knob fully counterclockwise.
If the indicator blinks even if doing so,
contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. There may be a trouble in the
center differential lock system.
See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-
structions.
164

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Four- wheel drive system

(multi- mode four- wheel drive
models)—
(a) Multi- mode control
Use the center differential lock system if
your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when
you are driving on a slippery or bumpy
surface. When the center differential is
locked, the vehicle stability control system
is automatically turned off and the center
differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator
lights come on because the function that
controls engine performance interferes
with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE
As soon as the center differential lock
Center differential lock switch switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”
indicator light comes on. After the
Use the multi- mode control switch wheels are out of the ditch or off the
knob and center differential lock switch slippery or bumpy surface, turn the
to select the transfer and center differ- center differential lock switch off.
ential modes. Make sure that the center differential
lock indicator light and vehicle stabil-
The “H4” and “L4” positions of the multi- ity control system off indicator light
mode control switch knob provide either turn off.
lock or unlock mode of the center differen-
tial depending on the center differential
lock switch position.

Multi- mode control switch knob

165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“H2” (high speed position, two- wheel “L4” (low speed position, four- wheel Use this for maximum power and traction.
drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- Use this for hard pulling in situations the
ti- mode control switch knob at “H2”, cen- ti- mode control switch knob at “L4”, cen- vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”
ter differential lock switch left out ter differential lock switch left out (low speed position, four- wheel drive, cen-
Use this for normal driving on dry hard- The four- wheel drive and “4LO” (low ter differential unlocked) mode. Also, using
surfaced roads. This position gives greater speed four- wheel drive) indicator lights this mode when driving down steep off-
economy, quietest ride, least wear and come on when the “L4” mode is selected. road inclines will help contribute to in-
better vehicle control. creased vehicle stability.
Use this for maximum power and traction.
“H4” (high speed position, four- wheel Use this for climbing or descending steep The indicator light tells when the differen-
drive, center differential unlocked): Mul- hills, off- road driving, and hard pulling in tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-
ti- mode control switch knob at “H4”, cen- sand or mud. ential is not still locked as long as the
ter differential lock switch left out indicator light remains off.
In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-
The four- wheel drive indicator light comes curs when the wheels are negotiating a When the operation is not completed, the
on when the “H4” mode is selected. sharp corner is further reduced than in the indicator blinks. If the indicator light does
“L4” (low speed position, four- wheel drive, not go off when you push out the center
Use this for normal driving on all types of differential lock switch, drive straight
roads, from dry hard- surfaced roads to center differential locked) mode.
ahead while accelerating or decelerating,
wet, icy or snow- covered roads. This “L4” (low speed position, four- wheel or drive in reverse.
position provides greater traction than drive, center differential locked): Multi-
If the center differential lock system op-
two- wheel drive. mode control switch knob at “L4”, center
eration is not completed within 5 seconds
“H4” (high speed position, four- wheel differential lock switch pushed in
while the cruise control system is set,
drive, center differential locked): Multi- The four- wheel drive and “4LO” (low cancel the cruise control system. To can-
mode control switch knob at “H4”, center speed four- wheel drive) indicator lights cel the cruise control system, see “Cruise
differential lock switch pushed in come on when the “L4” mode is selected. control” on page 193 in Section 1- 7.
The four- wheel drive indicator light comes If the indicator blinks even if doing so,
on when the “H4” mode is selected. contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
Use this for greater traction when you possible. There may be a trouble in the
experience a loss of power, such as center differential lock system.
wheel slipping, in the center differential See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in-
unlock mode. structions.
166

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(b) A.D.D.
(automatic disconnecting
differential) (c) Shifting procedure
The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen- SHIFTING BETWEEN “H2” AND “H4” To shift from “H4” (unlocked) to “H2”,
gaged by the shifting operations de- (UNLOCKED) turn the multi- mode control switch knob
scribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”. To shift from “H2” to “H4” (unlocked), fully counterclockwise.
You should drive in four- wheel drive for reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100 This can be done at any speed.
at least 16 km (10 miles) each month. km/h (62 mph) and turn the multi- mode If the four- wheel drive indicator light con-
This will assure that the front drive com- control switch knob fully clockwise. tinues to blink when you operate the mul-
ponents are lubricated. If the four- wheel drive indicator light con- ti- mode control switch knob from the “H4”
tinues to blink when you operate the mul- to the “H2” position, this reminds you that
ti- mode control switch knob from the “H2” the transfer mode is not securely in “H2”
to the “H4” position, this reminds you that mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler-
the transfer mode is not securely in “H4” ating or decelerating, or drive forward or
mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler- backward in a short distance.
ating or decelerating. If the indicator light continues to blink
If the four- wheel drive indicator light con- even if doing so, contact your Toyota
tinues to blink and the buzzer sounds dealer as soon as possible. There may be
when you operate the multi- mode control a trouble in the four- wheel drive system.
switch knob from the “H2” to the “H4”
position, this reminds you that the transfer CAUTION
mode is not in “H4” mode. Stop the ve-
hicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less Never operate the multi- mode control
than 100 km/h (62 mph). Operate the switch knob if the wheels are slip-
switch knob again. ping. Stop the slipping or spinning
before operating.

167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Traction control system

(two- wheel drive models)
SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED) If the “4LO” (low speed four- wheel drive) The traction control system automatical-
AND “H4” (LOCKED) indicator light continues to blink when you ly helps prevent the spinning of rear
To shift between unlock and lock operate the multi- mode control switch wheels when the vehicle is started or
modes in “H4”, push the center differen- knob to the “H4” or “L4” position, drive accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
tial lock switch. forward or backward in a short distance, When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
then stop the vehicle completely, shift the the system automatically turns on.
SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED) automatic transmission selector lever se-
AND “L4” (LOCKED) curely into “N” and operate the switch
CAUTION
To shift between unlock and lock knob again.
modes in “L4”, push the center differen- If the indicator continues to blink even if Under certain slippery road condi-
tial lock switch. doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as tions, full traction of the vehicle and
SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4” soon as possible. There may be a trouble power to the rear wheels cannot be
To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the in the four- wheel drive system. maintained, even though the traction
vehicle to a complete stop with the brake control system is in operation. Do not
pedal held down with your foot, shift the CAUTION drive the vehicle under any speed or
automatic transmission selector lever into maneuvering conditions which may
“N” and push and turn the multi- mode Never operate the multi- mode control cause the vehicle to lose traction
control switch knob fully clockwise. switch knob if the wheels are slip- control. In situations where the road
ping. Stop the slipping or spinning surface is covered with ice or snow,
To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the before operating. your vehicle should be fitted with
vehicle to a complete stop with the brake snow tires or tire chains. Always
pedal held down with your foot, shift the drive at an appropriate and cautious
automatic transmission selector lever into
speed for the present road condi-
“N” and turn the multi- mode control switch tions.
knob counterclockwise.

168

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

You may feel vibration or noise in your At the time the slip indicator light will
vehicle, caused by operation of the come on and the traction control system
brakes. This indicates the system is temporarily stops operating in order to
functioning properly. protect the brake actuator. (Although the
The slip indicator light comes on for a few traction control system does not operate,
seconds when the ignition key is turned there is no problem to continue your driv-
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not ing.) The system will be automatically re-
come on when the ignition is turned on, stored after a short time and the slip indi-
contact your Toyota dealer. cator light goes out.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the traction
control system, the “AUTO LSD” system,
the vehicle stability control system and
the hill- start assist control system such
NORMAL DRIVING MODE
as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator
Leave the system on during ordinary temperature becomes too high while any
driving so that it can operate when of the systems is operating, a buzzer will
needed. start to sound intermittently to indicate
You may hear a sound in the engine that the traction control system can no
compartment for a few seconds when the longer operate. In this case, immediately
engine is started or just after the vehicle stop your vehicle at a safe place.
begins to move. This means that the trac- If the system continues to operate, the
tion control system is in the self- check buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction. continuous. (The continuous buzzer
When the traction control system is oper- sounds for about 3 seconds.)
ating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the
rear wheels. At this time, the slip indi-
cator light blinks.

169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Active traction control system

(four- wheel drive models)

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly The active traction control system auto-
may turn on the light. It is normal if it matically helps prevent the spinning of
goes out after a few seconds. 4 wheels when the vehicle is started or
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
indicator light come on while driving, the When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
traction control system does not work. the system automatically turns on.
However, as normal braking operates
when being applied, there is no problem CAUTION
to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota Under certain slippery road condi-
dealer: tions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the 4 wheels cannot be

The warning light does not come on maintained, even though the traction
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
control system is in operation. Do not
“VSC TRAC” warning light
The warning light remains on after the drive the vehicle under any speed or
This light warns that there is a problem ignition key is turned to “ON”. maneuvering conditions which may
somewhere in the following.
The warning light comes on while driv- cause the vehicle to lose traction

Traction control system ing. control. In situations where the road
surface is covered with ice or snow,

“AUTO LSD” system your vehicle should be fitted with

Vehicle stability control system snow tires or tire chains. Always

Hill- start assist control system drive at an appropriate and cautious
speed for the present road condi-
When the system is normal and the igni- tions.
tion key is turned to “ON”, the “VSC
TRAC” warning light will come on and will
go off after a few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

170

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

You may feel vibration or noise in your At the time, the slip indicator light will
vehicle, caused by operation of the come on and the active traction control
brakes. This indicates the system is system temporarily stops operating in or-
functioning properly. der to protect the brake actuator. (Al-
The slip indicator light comes on for a few though the active traction control system
seconds when the ignition key is turned does not operate, there is no problem to
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not continue your driving.) The system will be
come on when the ignition is turned on, automatically restored after a short time
contact your Toyota dealer. and the slip indicator light goes out.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the active
traction control system, the vehicle stabil-
ity control system, the downhill assist con-
trol system and the hill- start assist control
Leave the system on during the ordi-
nary driving so that it can operate system such as on slippery roads. If the
brake actuator temperature becomes too
when needed.
high while any of the systems is operat-
You may hear a sound in the engine ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-
compartment for a few seconds when the tently to indicate that the active traction
engine is started or just after the vehicle control system can no longer operate. In
begins to move. This means that the ac- this case, immediately stop your vehicle at
tive traction control system is in the self- a safe place.
check mode, but does not indicate a mal-
function. If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
When the active traction control system is continuous. (The continuous buzzer
operating, the following conditions occur: sounds for about 3 seconds.)

The system controls the spinning of the
4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-
tor light blinks.

171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“AUTO LSD” system

(two- wheel drive models)
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
goes out after a few seconds.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip
indicator light come on while driving, the
active traction control system does not
work. However, as normal braking oper-
ates when being applied, there is no prob-
lem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
“VSC TRAC” warning light
The warning light remains on after the The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction
This light warns that there is a problem ignition key is turned to “ON”. by using the traction control system to
control engine performance and braking
somewhere in the following.
The warning light comes on while driv- when one of the rear wheels begins to

Active traction control system ing. spin.

Vehicle stability control system This system is used only when wheel

Downhill assist control system spinning occurs in a ditch or on a

Hill- start assist control system rough surface.
When the system is normal and the igni- This system is effective in case one of
tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning the rear wheels is spinning.
light will come on and will go off after a
few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the “VSC
TRAC” warning light may stay on for 60
seconds after the ignition key is turned to
“ON”.

172

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

NOTICE
Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system
in conditions other than the above. A
much greater steering effort and more
careful cornering control will be re-
quired.

To activate the system, push the “AUTO Make sure the “AUTO LSD” indicator light
LSD” switch with the vehicle stopped. comes on under the above condition when
The “AUTO LSD” is activated when you use the “AUTO LSD” system.
driving at a speed under 100 km/h (62 The slip indicator light blinks when the
mph). At this time, the “AUTO LSD” system is controlling the spinning of the
indicator light will come on. rear wheels.
To cancel the system, push the “AUTO The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
LSD” switch once again. come on for a few seconds when the
If the engine is turned off while the ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indi-
“AUTO LSD” indicator light is on and then cator lights does not come on when the
restarted, the indicator light will turn off ignition key is turned to “ON”, contact
automatically. your Toyota dealer.

173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The brake actuator temperature increases Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
during continuous operation of the “AUTO may turn on the light. It is normal if it
LSD” system, the traction control system goes out after a few seconds.
and the vehicle stability control system If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip
such as on slippery roads. If the brake indicator light comes on while driving, the
actuator temperature becomes too high “AUTO LSD” system does not work. How-
while any of the systems is operating, a ever, as the brakes operate normally when
buzzer will start to sound intermittently to applied, it is no problem to continue your
indicate that the “AUTO LSD” system can driving.
no longer operate. In this case, immedi-
ately stop your vehicle at a safe place. In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
The warning light does not come on
continuous. (The continuous buzzer after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
sounds for about 3 seconds.) “VSC TRAC” warning light
The warning light remains on after the
At the time the slip indicator light will This light warns that there is a problem ignition key is turned to “ON”.
come on and the “AUTO LSD” system somewhere in the following.
The warning light comes on while driv-
temporarily stops operating in order to
“AUTO LSD” system ing.
protect the brake actuator. (Although the

Traction control system NOTICE
“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, it
is no problem to continue driving.) The
Vehicle stability control system
Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD”
system will be automatically restored after When the system is normal and the igni-
switch continuously turned on.
a short time and the slip indicator light tion key is turned to “ON”, the light will
goes off. come on and will go off after a few sec-
onds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

174

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Vehicle stability control

system
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the CAUTION
systems such as anti- lock brake sys-
tem, traction control, engine control,
Do not rely excessively on the ve-
etc. This system automatically controls hicle stability control system. Even
the output of the brakes or engine to if the vehicle stability control sys-
help prevent the vehicle from skidding tem is operating, you must always
when cornering on a slippery road sur- drive carefully and attentively to
face or operating steering wheel abrupt- avoid serious injury. Reckless driv-
ly. ing will result in an unexpected ac-
cident. If the slip indicator light
This vehicle stability control activates
blinks and an alarm sounds, special
when the vehicle speed is more than 15
care should be taken while driving.
km/h (9 mph).

Only use tires of specified size. The
You may hear a sound in the engine
size, manufacturer, brand and tread If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-
compartment for a few seconds when the pattern for all 4 tires should be the ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an
engine is started or just after the vehicle
same. If you use the tires other alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
begins to move. This means that the sys-
than specified, or different type or should be taken while driving.
tem is in the self- check mode, but does
size, the vehicle stability control If the brake pedal is depressed while the
not indicate a malfunction.
system may not function correctly. vehicle stability control system is active,
When replacing the tires or wheels, the brake pedal will become hard at an
contact your Toyota dealer. (See earlier position than usual. However, the
“Checking and replacing tires” on brakes will respond to the pedal force if
page 384 in Section 7- 2.) depressed further.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.

175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition key is turned to
“ON”.

The indicator light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The indicator light comes on when the
system is on while driving.

NOTICE
Make sure that the center differential
lock indicator light goes off before
Four- wheel drive models only— “VSC TRAC” warning light
normal driving.
Pushing the center differential lock This light warns that there is a problem
switch automatically turns the vehicle somewhere in the following.
stability control system off. At this
Vehicle stability control system
time, the “VSC OFF” indicator comes
on with the center differential lock indi-
Traction control system
cator light. (two- wheel drive models)

The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on
Active traction control system
for a few seconds when the ignition key (four- wheel drive models)
is turned to “ON”. It will come on again
“AUTO LSD” system
when you push the center differential lock (two- wheel drive models)
switch to turn off the system.
Downhill assist control system
(four- wheel drive models)

Hill- start assist control system

176

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Downhill assist control system

(four- wheel drive models)
The light will come on when the ignition The downhill assist control system is a TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST
key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after system that assists the deceleration of CONTROL SYSTEM
about a few seconds. the engine brake when you drive down 1. Full- time four- wheel drive models—
The light may come on for 60 seconds a steep hill. When you are driving down Turn the four- wheel drive control
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It a hill with the four- wheel drive control switch knob to the “L4” position.
is normal if they go out after a while. switch knob (full- time four- wheel drive
models) or multi- mode control switch The system will not operate if the four-
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly knob (multi- mode four- wheel drive wheel drive control switch knob is in the
may turn on the light. It is normal if they models) in the “L4” position, push the “H4” position.
go out after a few seconds. “DAC” switch to limit the vehicle’s ac- Multi- mode four- wheel drive mod-
If the “VSC TRAC” waning light and slip celeration. If the vehicle is traveling at els—Turn the multi- mode control
indicator light come on while driving, the a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, switch knob to the “L4” position.
vehicle stability control system does not you can descend at a constant speed. The system will not operate if the multi-
work. However, as normal braking oper- mode control switch knob is in the “H4”
ates when being applied, there is no prob- CAUTION position.
lem to continue your driving.
Do not rely excessively on the down- 2. In order to make full use of the en-
In the following cases, contact your Toyota gine brake, putting the transmission
dealer: hill assist control system. It may not
be able to maintain a low speed over in “L” or “2” is recommended.

The warning light does not come on road surfaces or off- road surfaces on The system will operate even if the trans-
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. which sliding can easily occur, such mission selector lever is in “D”, “4”, “3”

The warning light remains on after the as extremely steep slopes or icy or or “N”. However, when it is in “L” or “2”
ignition key is turned to “ON”. muddy roads. the engine brake can also be utilized en-

The warning light comes on while driv- abling the system to operate more effec-
ing. tively.

177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the indicator light does not come on

when the switch is pushed, contact your
Toyota dealer.

3. Push the “DAC” switch to turn the With the vehicle traveling at a speed of
system on. The downhill assist con- 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release your
trol system indicator light on the in- foot from the accelerator or brake pedal
strument panel will come on. to activate the system. The vehicle will
Full- time four- wheel drive models—If the descend the hill at a low speed. While the
downhill assist control system indicator system is operating, the slip indicator light
light flashes, the selector lever may be in on the instrument panel will flash and the
“N” or the four- wheel drive control switch stop lights and high mounted stoplight will
knob may be in the “H4” position. be lit.
If the indicator light does not come on If you push the “DAC” switch to turn the
when the switch is pushed, contact your system off while it is in operation, the
Toyota dealer. system will stop operating gradually. The
downhill assist control system indicator
Multi- mode four- wheel drive models—If light will flash to alert the driver. To con-
the downhill assist control system indica- tinue driving at a low speed, push the
tor light flashes, the selector lever may be “DAC” switch to turn the system on.
in “N” or the multi- mode control switch
knob may be in the “H2” or “H4” position.
178

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The slip indicator light and downhill assist At this time, the slip indicator light will
control system indicator light come on for come on, the downhill assist control sys-
a few seconds when the ignition key is tem indicator light flash and the downhill
turned to “ON”. If any of the indicator assist control system stops operating tem-
lights does not come on when the ignition porarily in order to protect the brake ac-
is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer. tuator. (Although the downhill assist con-
The brake actuator temperature increases trol system does not operate, it is no
during continuous operation of the hill- problem to continue your driving.) The
start assist control system, the active system will be automatically restored after
traction control system and the vehicle a short time and the slip indicator light
stability control system. If the brake ac- and the downhill assist control system in-
tuator temperature becomes too high while dicator light go out.
any of the systems is operating, a buzzer
will start to sound intermittently to indicate
that the downhill assist control system can If there is any abnormality in the sys-
no longer operate. In this case, stop your tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will
vehicle immediately at a safe place. come on. When the “DAC” switch is
pushed, the downhill assist control sys-
If the system continues to operate, the tem indicator light also flash.
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous. (The continuous buzzer If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes
sounds for about 3 seconds.) on, there may be an abnormality in any
of the following systems in addition to the
downhill assist control system.

Hill- start assist control system

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Hill- start assist control

system
“VSC TRAC” warning light The hill- start assist control system as- The hill- start assist control system will
When the system is normal and the igni- sists you in starting to move up a operate for 5 seconds maximally when
tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning steep or slippery hill. When you start all of the following conditions apply.
light will come on and will go off after a to move up the hill slope, the system
When the transmission is in any of
few seconds. helps to prevent the vehicle from roll- positions “D”, “4”, “3”, “2” or “L”
ing backward in the interval while you
It is not a malfunction that the warning move your foot from the brake pedal to
When the brake pedal is not de-
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the the accelerator pedal. pressed
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. The system is designed to operate when
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly CAUTION the vehicle is starting on an uphill slope;
may turn on the light. It is normal if it therefore, if the transmission is in “P” or
goes out after a few seconds.
Do not rely excessively on the hill- “N” it will not operate. It will not operate
If the warning light comes on while driv- start assist control system. The ve- either if the vehicle starts to move in
ing, the system does not work. However, hicle may not be able to start reverse on a slope with the transmission
as normal braking operates when being smoothly on road surfaces or off- in the “R”.
applied, it is no problem to continue your road surfaces such as extremely
driving. steep slopes or icy roads, on which
sliding can occur very easily.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
Do not use the hill- start assist con-
trol system to stop the vehicle. This

The warning light does not come on system is not designed as a func-
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
tion for stopping the vehicle on a

The warning light remains on after the uphill slope.
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-
ing.

180

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Keep in mind the following when driv- If the system continues to operate, the
ing. buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

The hill- start assist control system op- continuous. (The continuous buzzer
erates for 5 seconds maximally. If both sounds for about 3 seconds.)
the brake and accelerator pedals re- At this time, the slip indicator light will
main undepressed for longer than 5 come on and the hill- start assist control
seconds, the buzzer will sound at more system stops operating temporarily in or-
frequent intervals and the system will der to protect the brake actuator. (Al-
gradually stop operating. though the hill- start assist control system

The hill- start assist control system is does not operate, it is no problem to con-
not designed as a function for stopping tinue your driving.) The system will be
the vehicle on a uphill slope. When automatically restored after a short time
stopping the vehicle, be sure to de- and the slip indicator light goes out.
press the brake pedal.
When the hill- start assist control system
is operating, the slip indicator light flashes The brake actuator temperature increases
and an alarm sounds intermittently. At the during continuous operation of the downhill
same time, the stop lamps and high assist control system (four- wheel drive
mounted stoplight are lit. models), the traction control system (two-
wheel drive models), the active traction
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned control system (four- wheel drive models),
the vehicle stability control system and
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
the “AUTO LSD” system (two- wheel drive
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer. models) on such as slippery roads. If the
brake actuator temperature becomes too
high while any of the systems is operat-
ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-
tently to indicate that the hill- start assist
control system can no longer operate. In
this case, stop your vehicle immediately at
a safe place.

181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear height control air

suspension

Vehicle stability control system

“AUTO LSD” system
(two- wheel drive models)
“VSC TRAC” warning light
When the system is normal and the igni-
tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning
light will come on and will go off after a
few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
If there is any abnormality in the sys- This rear height control air suspension
tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will goes out after a few seconds. controls the vehicle height depending
come on. If the warning light comes on while driv- on the vehicle driving conditions. Select
If the system malfunctions, the “VSC ing, the system does not work. However, your desired height among the “HI”
as normal braking operates when being (high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low)
TRAC” warning light will come on.
applied, it is no problem to continue your modes with the height select switch.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes driving.
on, there may be an abnormality in any (a) Vehicle height modes
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
of the following systems in addition to the “N” (normal) mode—
hill- start assist control system. dealer:
The vehicle height in this mode is stan-

Downhill assist control system
The warning light does not come on dard. Regardless of the number of occu-
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
(four- wheel drive models) pants or the luggage loading condition, the

Traction control system
The warning light remains on after the vehicle height is always automatically ad-
ignition key is turned to “ON”. justed to a fixed height in this mode while
(two- wheel drive models)

Active traction control system
The warning light comes on while driv- the engine is running.
ing. This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.
(four- wheel drive models)

182

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“HI” (high) mode— “LO” (low) mode—
When selecting a mode, there is a ve-
The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8 hicle speed limit. Refer to the following
in.) higher at rear than the “N” mode in.) lower at rear than the “N” mode table.
height. height. Yes = The mode can be selected.
This mode is suitable when driving on the This mode allows you easy access to the No = The mode cannot be selected.
bumpy roads and through water. vehicle (getting in and out) and easy load- “LO” “N” “HI”
However, when the vehicle speed exceeds ing and unloading operation. mode mode mode
about 30 km/h (19 mph) or over in the This mode is available when the vehicle
Under about
“HI” mode, the “N” mode is automatically speed is under about 12 km/h (7 mph).
12 km/h Yes Yes Yes
selected.
NOTICE (7 mph)
CAUTION Under about
Use the “LO” mode when the vehicle No Yes Yes
30 km/h
is stopped. Otherwise, when the ve- (19 mph)
The “HI” mode should be used for
hicle speed exceeds about 12 km/h (7
severe off- road driving condition About
mph), “N” mode is selected automati-
only. Because the vehicle’s center of 30 km/h
cally. So be careful when you drive in No Yes No
gravity is higher in this setting, the (19 mph) or
any place where the overhead height
vehicle may become unstable when over
is limited.
turning abruptly, resulting in accident.
In the following cases, the rear height
(b) Vehicle height mode changing con- control suspension will not operate.
dition

The underbody of the vehicle has
To change the vehicle height, it is neces- touched the surface on bumpy roads.
sary to meet the following conditions.

The area around the rear suspension

The engine should be running. is coated with ice.

The height control “OFF” indicator light
should go off.

183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the vehicle is moved to its usual loca- To change the “LO” mode to “HI”, push
tion or the ice is removed and the height the switch twice. It takes about 30 sec-
select switch is pressed, the vehicle onds until the “LO” mode changes to the
height control cannot be operated. In this “HI” mode.
case, turn off and restart the engine, then Selecting the “N” mode—
push the control switches.
To change the “HI” mode to “N”, push
the height select switch on the “” side
once.
To change the “LO” mode to “N”, push
the height select switch on the “
” side
once.
Selecting the “LO” mode—
Push the height select switch on the “”
(c) Vehicle height adjustment
side while the vehicle is stopped.
To change the mode, push the height
To change the “N” mode to “LO”, push
select switch on either side of “
”
(higher) or “” (lower). the switch once.
To change the “HI” mode to “LO”, push
The height control indicator light indicates
which mode is selected. (See “(e) Height the switch twice.
control indicator light” described below.) Even if the engine is stopped while the
vehicle height is being lowered, the opera-
Selecting the “HI” mode—
tion continues for up to 25 seconds. If,
Push the height select switch on the “
” within this 25 seconds, any of the side
side when the vehicle speed is under doors or the back door is opened, opera-
about 30 km/h (19 mph). tion will continue for a further 15 seconds.
To change the “N” mode to “HI”, push
the switch once.

184

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(d) Turning off the rear height control

NOTICE
air suspension

If the vehicle height is changed fre- To turn off the rear height control air
quently when the vehicle is heavily suspension with the vehicle stopped,
loaded, the compressor may over- push the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF”
heat, causing the vehicle height ad- switch. The height control “OFF” indi-
justment operation to stop. cator light comes on and the vehicle

Before you lower the vehicle height height is fixed in the same mode as the
with the height select switch, check height control switch is pushed.
under the vehicle to make sure This status is memorized in the system
nothing to damage the vehicle or even after the engine is stopped.
no one to be injured is there and
If you push the switch again, the height
that the underbody of the vehicle
control “OFF” indicator light goes out and
does not touch the ground.
the rear height control air suspension is

After unloading, the height of a ve- turned on.
hicle equipped with the rear height
Even after the rear height control air sus-
control air suspension becomes
pension is turned off with the “HEIGHT
slightly higher than the normal ve-
CONTROL OFF” switch, if the vehicle
hicle height. Take sufficient care
speed exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the
where the overhead height is re-
rear height control air suspension automat-
stricted.
ically selects the “N” mode.

Do not select the “LO” mode in the
bumpy roads. If the underbody of
the vehicle touches the rugged road
surface, the vehicle may be dam-
aged.

185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION
If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off

the rear height control air suspen-
If you drive through deep water over sion with the “HEIGHT CONTROL
about 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, put OFF” switch. Otherwise, the vehicle
the vehicle height in the “HI” mode height may change because of the
with the height select switch and then automatic leveling function resulting
turn off the rear height control air in an unexpected accident.
suspension by pushing the “HEIGHT
CONTROL OFF” switch.

NOTICE

When jacking up or installing tire
chains, be sure to turn off the rear (e) Height control indicator lights
height control air suspension by 1. Height control indicator lights
pushing the “HEIGHT CONTROL
2. Height control “OFF” indicator light
OFF” switch and stop the engine.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may When the ignition switch is turned on, all
change because of the automatic the indicator lights come on. The indicator
leveling function, resulting in an un- light showing the present mode only re-
expected accident. mains on and all other lights go off after
a few seconds. This means the system

If your vehicle must be towed, put
operates correctly.
the vehicle height in the “N” mode
and turn off the rear height control
air suspension. Otherwise, the ve-
hicle height may change because of
the automatic leveling function, re-
sulting in an unexpected accident.

186

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1. The present mode indicator light goes
The height control “OFF” indicator light
off and the selected mode indicator does not come on when the ignition
light blinks. switch is turned on.
2. The selected mode indicator light goes
The height control “OFF” indicator light
off. (The vehicle height does not blinks.
change.) The present mode indicator (f) Parking and stopping tips
light comes on again.
If you immediately stop the engine to park
In this case, even if the vehicle is moved the vehicle after off- road driving, the ve-
to its usual location or the ice is removed hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve-
and the height select switch is pressed, hicle becomes cool. When parking, make
vehicle height control cannot be operated. sure there is nothing that will be in con-
Turn off the engine once and then restart tact with the underbody of the vehicle.
it. When you start the engine, the vehicle
If you change the vehicle height mode, Height control “OFF” indicator light: returns to the previous height.
the indicator lights change as follows: When the ignition switch is turned on, this If you park the vehicle for a long time,
light comes on. If it goes out after a few the vehicle height may be gradually low-
When changing the vehicle height from
seconds, the rear height control air sus- ered. When parking for a long time, make
the “N” mode to “HI”:
pension operates correctly. If you push the sure there is nothing that will be in con-
1. The “N” mode indicator light goes off “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch, the rear tact with the underbody of the vehicle.
and the “HI” mode indicator light blinks. height control air suspension is turned off. When you start the engine, the vehicle
2. After the vehicle height control reaches The height control “OFF” indicator light returns to the previous height.
the “HI” mode, the “HI” mode indicator comes on.
light remains on. If you stop the engine, the vehicle height
In the following cases, there is a problem may change in accordance with the
If the underbody of the vehicle has somewhere in the rear height control air change in the temperature. When you
touched the surface on bumpy roads or suspension. Although there is no problem start the engine, the vehicle returns to the
the area around the rear suspension is to continue normal driving, have the rear previous height.
coated with ice, the vehicle height cannot height control air suspension checked by
be lowered with the height select switch. your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
The height control indicator lights change
as follows:

187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tire pressure warning

system—
(g) Rear height control failure warning The tire pressure warning system is de-
If there is a problem somewhere in the signed to provide warning when tire
rear height control air suspension, the “N” inflation pressure of one or more of
mode is automatically selected. If this oc- your tires (including the spare tire) is
curs, the height control “OFF” indicator low. The low tire pressure warning light
light blinks and the vehicle height control comes on to inform you that low tire
cannot be activated until the malfunction inflation pressure may hamper driving.
is corrected. If this is the case, bring your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible and have it checked.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT

This light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off
after a few seconds. This indicates that
the tire pressure warning system is func-
tioning properly.

188

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the low tire pressure warning light

CAUTION NOTICE
comes on or blinks, do the following.
If the warning light comes on:
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
When the tire pressure warning light
tire as air pressure sensors will be
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as comes on, observe the following in-
damaged.
soon as possible and check that the structions:
inflation pressure of all tires (including
When the tires must be repaired or

Depending on the conditions, re- replaced, have them repaired or re-
the spare tire) is as specified on the
duce to an appropriate speed as
tire and loading information label. (See placed by the nearest Toyota dealer
soon as possible.
“Checking tire inflation pressure” on or authorized tire dealer. The tire
page 381 in Section 7- 2.) If the warning
Adjust the tire pressure to the spe- pressure sensors will be affected by
light comes on even after tire inflation cified level as soon as possible. the installation or removal of tires.
pressure adjustment, you may have a
Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-
The tire pressure warning system is
flat tire. If you have a flat tire, replace vering and braking. Tire deteriora- not to be used as a substitute for
it with the spare tire. For details, see tion may reduce steering wheel con- regular inspections. Be sure to
“If you have a flat tire” on page 335 in trol and brake effectiveness. This check the air pressure in the tires
Section 4. may lead to serious injury or death. on a regular basis.
The warning light goes off a few minutes
The tire pressure warning system
When the tires must be replaced,
after air is put into the deflated tire. may not activate immediately if sud- replace the grommets for air pres-
This warning light may turn on due to den bursts of air leakage occur. sure sensors as well.
natural causes such as natural air leaks
or tire pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the tire
pressure will turn off the warning light.

189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If the warning light blinks:

CAUTION
The tire pressure warning system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota

The use of non- genuine wheels will
dealer.
cause the air pressure sensors to
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION transmit the electronic code in dif-
The tire pressure warning system does ferent manner, resulting in the sys-
not function properly under certain cir- tem failure.
cumstances. In the following cases, the
The use of different type of tires
low tire pressure warning light may not with genuine wheels may also
come on even if the tire inflation pres- cause the malfunction of the sys-
sure is low, or it may come on when tem.
the tire inflation pressure is actually
normal.

Electric devices or facilities using simi-
lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

A radio set to similar frequencies is in
use.

A lot of snow or ice covers the ve-
hicle, in particular, around the wheels
or wheel housings.

The tires are not equipped with an air
pressure sensor.

Snow tires or tire chains are used.

Non- genuine Toyota wheels are used.

The sensor battery is expired.

Radio waves from the air pressure sen-
sor installed on the spare tire cannot
be received.
190

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

CAUTION NOTICE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the This equipment has been tested and
When the tire pressure monitoring FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the found to comply with the limits for a
system warning light is lit, one or following two conditions: Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
more of your tires is significantly un- 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
der- inflated. You should stop and (1) This device may not cause harmful designed to provide reasonable protec-
check your tires as soon as possible, interference, and (2) this device must tion against harmful interference in a
and inflate them to the proper pres- accept any interference received, includ- residential installation. This equipment
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire ing interference that may cause unde- generates, uses and can radiate radio
information placard. Driving on a sig- sired operation. frequency energy and, if not installed
nificantly under- inflated tire causes and used in accordance with the instruc-
the tire to overheat and can lead to tions, may cause harmful interference to
tire failure. Under- inflation also re- radio communications. However, there is
duces fuel efficiency and tire tread no guarantee that interference will not
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han- occur in a particular installation. If this
dling and stopping ability. Each tire, equipment does cause harmful interfer-
including the spare, should be ence to radio or television reception,
checked monthly when cold and set which can be determined by turning the
to the recommended inflation pres- equipment off and on, the user is en-
sure as specified in the vehicle plac- couraged to try to correct the interfer-
ard and owner’s manual. ence by one or more of the following
measures:

191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Replacing tires and wheels Parking brake

When replacing the wheels, be sure to

Reorient or relocate the receiving an- install air pressure sensors on the
tenna. wheels.

Increase the separation between the There are 3 ways to set up the air pres-
equipment and receiver. sure sensors:

Connect the equipment into an outlet a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel
on a circuit different from that to and install it to the new wheel.
which the receiver is connected.
b. Keep the same wheel with air pressure

Consult the dealer or an experienced sensor and replace only the tire.
radio/TV technician for help.
c. Use a new wheel and sensor. In this
FCC WARNING: case, you have to register an ID code
Changes or modifications not ex- for a new sensor.
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the CAUTION When parking, firmly apply the parking
user’s authority to operate the equip- brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
ment. Have the tires, wheels or sensors re- To set: Fully depress the parking brake
placed and ID codes registered by a pedal. For better holding power, first de-
For vehicles sold in Canada Toyota dealer. If you need sensors, press the brake pedal and hold it while
purchase from a Toyota dealer. setting the parking brake.
Operation is subject to the following two To release: Depress the parking brake
conditions: pedal once again.
(1) this device may not cause interfer- To remind you that the parking brake is
ence, and (2) this device must accept set, the parking brake reminder light in
any interference, including interference the instrument panel remains on until you
that may cause undesired operation of release the parking brake.
the device.

192

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Cruise control
The cruise control allows you to cruise
CAUTION the vehicle at a desired speed over 40
km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off
Before driving, be sure the parking the accelerator pedal.
brake is fully released and the park-
Your cruising speed can be maintained up
ing brake reminder light is off.
or down grades within the limits of engine
performance, although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or
down the grades. On steeper hills, a
greater speed change will occur so it is
better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum control TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

of your vehicle, do not use the To operate the cruise control, press the
cruise control when driving in “ON- OFF” button. This turns the system
heavy or varying traffic, or on slip- on. The indicator light in the instrument
pery (rainy, icy or snow- covered) or panel shows that you can now set the
winding roads. vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-

Avoid vehicle speed increases when er press will turn the system completely
driving downhill. If the vehicle off.
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the CAUTION
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking To avoid accidental cruise control en-
to slow down. gagement, keep the “ON- OFF” button
off when not using the cruise control.

193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If you need acceleration—for example, RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

when passing—depress the accelerator Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed and hold it. Release the lever when the
the set speed. When you release it, the desired speed is attained. While the lever
vehicle will return to the speed set prior is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
to the acceleration. speed.
CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED However, a faster way to reset is to ac-
You can cancel the preset speed by: celerate the vehicle and then push the
a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di- lever down in the “- SET” direction.
rection and releasing it. RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
b. Depressing the brake pedal. Push the lever down in the “- SET” direc-
c. Pushing the “ON- OFF” button. tion and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
The transmission must be in “D” before km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto- gradually decrease.
matically cancel out.
you set the cruise control speed. However, a faster way to reset is to de-
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed, If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 press the brake pedal and then push the
mph) below the preset speed, the preset lever down in the “- SET” direction.
push the lever down in the “- SET” direc-
tion and release it. This sets the vehicle speed will also automatically cancel out.
Even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, with
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac- If the preset speed automatically cancels the cruise control on, engine braking will
tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed, out other than for the above cases, have not be enabled because the cruise control
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal- is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h er at the earliest opportunity. speed, reset to a slower speed with the
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off cruise control lever or depress the brake
the accelerator pedal. pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise
control is cancelled.

194

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
the control lever or by depressing the
brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
“+ RES” direction will restore the speed
set prior to cancellation.
CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes when using the
cruise control, press the “ON- OFF” button
to turn the system off and then press it
again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then oc-
curs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.

The indicator light does not come on.

The indicator light flashes again.

The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

196

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 8
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio system
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Rear seat audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Using your audio system—

Reference —Some basics
This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your sys-
tem.
Your audio system works when the ignition
key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off.
Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or
“LOAD” to turn on that function without
pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cas-
Type 1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com- Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com- sette or compact disc player, a cassette
pact disc player (with compact disc pact disc player with changer or compact disc must be loaded in the
changer controller) player.
You can turn on the each player by insert-
ing a cassette tape or compact disc.
You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the
audio system was previously off, then the
entire audio system will be turned off
when you eject the cassette tape or com-
pact disc. If another function was pre-
viously playing, it will come on again.
SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or
“LOAD” if the system is already on but
you want to switch from one function to
another.
198

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TONE AND BALANCE YOUR RADIO ANTENNA YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)
For details about your system’s tone and Your vehicle has an antenna printed on When you insert a disc, gently push it in
balance controls, see the description of the inside of the rear quarter window. with the label side up. The player will play
your own system. from track 1 through to the end of the
NOTICE disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.
Tone
How good an audio program sounds to Attaching the film (especially conduc- NOTICE
you is largely determined by the mix of tive or metallic type) on the rear
the treble, midrange and bass levels. In quarter glass will noticeably reduce Never try to disassemble or oil any
fact, different kinds of music and vocal the sensitivity of the radio. part of the compact disc player. Do
programs usually sound better with differ- not insert anything other than com-
ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass. YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER pact discs into the slot.
Balance When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should face to the right. The player is intended for use with 12 cm
A good balance of the left and right stereo
(4.7 in.) discs only.
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important. NOTICE YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 2)
Keep in mind that if you are listening to Do not oil any part of the player and
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing do not insert anything other than cas- When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
the right/left balance will increase the vol- sette tapes into the slot, or the tape button and gently push the disc in with
ume of one group of sounds while de- player may be damaged. the label side up. This compact disc play-
creasing the volume of another. er can store up to six discs. The player
will play from track 1 through to the end
of the disc. Then it will play from track
1 of the next disc.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

NOTICE

Do not stack up two discs for in-
sertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc player. Insert only
one compact disc into slot at a
time.

Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything except a com-
pact disc into the slot.

200

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Controls and features

Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons) (Program) Compact disc player

These buttons are used to preset and Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or
Push “ ” (preset button 4) to select
tune in radio stations.
the other side of a cassette tape. The “ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
To preset a station to a button: Tune in display indicates which side is currently reverse within a compact disc. When you
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or release the button, the compact disc play-
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the er will resume playing.
button until you hear a beep—this will set indicates the bottom side).
the station to the button. The button num- Auto- reverse feature: After the cassette AM
ber will appear on the display. player reaches the end of a tape side, it Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
To recall a preset station: Push the button automatically reverses and begins to play and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
for the station you want. The button num- the other side. This is true whether the on the display.
ber and station frequency will appear on cassette was playing or fast forwarding. AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-
the display. (Reverse/Fast forward button) ance adjustment function)
These systems can store one AM and two Cassette player By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob,
FM stations for each button. (The display you can adjust the tone and sound bal-
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for- ance. On some models, you can also turn
push “AM” or “FM” button.) ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on on or off the surround function.
the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5) Each time you push this knob, the mode
(Eject button)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on changes. To adjust the tone and balance
Push the cassette tape eject button to the display. and turn on or off the surround function,
eject a cassette. Push the compact disc turn the knob.
To stop the tape while it is fast forward-
eject button to eject a compact disc.
ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop BAS: Adjusts low- pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from -5 to 5.
the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”
or “TAPE” button. MID: Adjusts mid- pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from -5 to 5.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same TRE: Adjusts high- pitched tones. The dis-
side. If a tape fast forwards completely, play ranges from -5 to 5.
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto- reverse feature.
202

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between “NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
the front and rear speakers. The display separate unit is empty. Insert a disc. by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-
ranges from F7 to R7. “ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside tion, play your tapes with this button on
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the system. Eject the disc or magazine. or off according to the mode used to re-
the right and left speakers. The display Set the disc or magazine again. cord the tape.
∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
ranges from L7 to R7. “ERROR 4”: Over- current. Ask your Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround Toyota dealer to inspect. double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
function. “SURROUND ON” or “CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
“SURROUND OFF” will appear on the FM
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
display. compact disc changer lid. Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
DISC (Compact disc) and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”
If the malfunction still exists, take your
will appear on the display. This system
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
allows you to set twelve FM stations, two
disc.  DISC
for each of the preset button.
When the audio system is set into com- With compact disc changer only— PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
pact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently Use these buttons to select the disc you Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
being played. want to listen to. on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
Push “” (preset button 3) or “
” (preset volume.
Error messages
button 4) until the number of the disc you RAND (Random)
If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- want to listen appears on the display.
tem will display one of the six following There are two random features—you can
error messages. Dolby B NR∗ either listen to the tracks on one compact
If you are listening to a tape that was disc in random order, or listen to the
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction, tracks on all the compact discs in the
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” will magazine in random order.
down.
appear on the display. Push the button
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-
again to turn off Dolby B NR.
aged or inserted incorrectly (up- side
down). Clean the disc and re- insert it.

203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

To play the tracks on one disc in random Compact disc player SCAN
order: There are two repeat features—You can Radio
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset either replay a disc track or a whole com- You can either scan all the frequencies on
button 1). “ ” will appear on the pact disc. a band or scan only the preset stations
display and the player will perform the Repeating a track: for that band.
tracks on the disc you are listening to in Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
random order. To turn off the random fea- To scan the preset stations:
button 2) while the track is playing. Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
ture, push this button again.
“ ” will appear on the display. When you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
With compact disc changer only— the track ends, it will automatically replay. the next preset station up the band, stay
To play all the tracks in the magazine in To turn off the repeat feature, push this there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
random order: button again. next preset station. To stop scanning,
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1) With compact disc changer only— push this button again.
until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap- Repeating a disc: To scan all the frequencies:
pear on the display and the player will Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2) Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
perform all the tracks on all the discs in ton. The radio will find the next station up
the magazine in random order. To turn off until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap- the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
the random feature, push this button pear on the display. The player will repeat and then scan again to the next station.
again. all the tracks on the disc you are listening To stop scanning, push this button again.
to. When the disc ends, the player will
RPT (Repeat) automatically go back to the first track on
Cassette player the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the feature, push this button again.

track is playing. “ ” will appear on

the display. When the track ends, it will
automatically rewind and replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the re-
peat feature to work correctly.
204

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Compact disc player SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down) Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei- Radio Use this button to skip up or down to a
ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or In the seek mode, the radio finds and different track.
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the plays the next station up or down the Push “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/
magazine. station band. TRACK” button until the number of the
Scanning the tracks on a disc: To seek the next station, quickly push and track you want to listen to appears on the
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but- release “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/ display. If you want to return to the begin-
ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display TRACK” button. Do this again to find the ning of the current track, quickly push the
and the player will scan all the tracks on station after that. down side of the button one time.
the disc you are listening to. To stop ST (Stereo reception) display
scanning, push this button again. If the Cassette Player
player scanned all the tracks on the disc, Use this button to skip up or down to Your radio automatically changes to stereo
it will stop scanning. locate a song or recording. reception when a stereo broadcast is re-
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the
With compact disc changer only— You can select up to nine recordings (in- signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
Scanning the first tracks of all the discs cluding current one). the amount of channel separation to prev-
in the magazine: A blank space of at least 3 seconds is ent the weak signal from creating noise.
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a considered to be a start of a recording. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis- When the beginning of a tape is reached, radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
play and the player will scan the first the player automatically resumes play. tion.
track of the next disc. To stop scanning, When the end of the tape is reached, the TAPE
push this button again. If the player has player automatically reverses sides and Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
scanned all the discs, it will stop scan- resumes normal play. tape.
ning.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.

205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TEXT
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the com-
pact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.
TUNE (Tuning)
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-
clockwise to step down the frequency.

206

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons) (Eject button) (Program)

These buttons are used to preset and Cassette player Push “ ” (preset button 4) to select
tune in radio stations.
This button is used to eject a cassette. the other side of a cassette tape. The
To preset a station to a button: Tune in display indicates which side is currently
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or Compact disc player
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the This button is used to eject one or all
button until you hear a beep—this will set compact discs. indicates the bottom side).
the station to the button. The preset but- To eject the current compact disc, push Auto- reverse feature: After the cassette
ton number will appear on the display. and release the compact disc eject button. player reaches the end of a tape side, it
RDS stations will be preset to the buttons automatically reverses and begins to play
To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset the other side. This is true whether the
when you turn on the RDS. (See “RDS” button 3) or “
” (preset button 4) until the
button.) cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
number of the disc you want to eject is
To recall a preset station: Push the button displayed. Push and release the eject but- (Reverse/Fast forward button)
for the station you want. The preset but- ton. Cassette player
ton number and station frequency will ap- To eject all discs at a time, press and
pear on the display. hold the eject button until you hear a Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for-
This radio can store one AM, two FM and beep. The last compact disc played before ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
RDS stations for each button. (The display pushing the button will be ejected first. If the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)
will show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM the ejected disc is not removed for a long to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
TYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” but- time, the eject function will be cancelled. the display.
ton.) To stop the tape while it is fast forward-
ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto- reverse feature.
208

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Compact disc player FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between “ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the front and rear speakers. The display the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or ranges from F7 to R7. Set the disc or magazine again.
“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between “ERROR 4”: Over- current. Ask your
reverse within a compact disc. When you the right and left speakers. The display Toyota dealer to inspect.
release the button, the compact disc play- ranges from L7 to R7.
er will resume playing. “CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround lid of separate unit is open. Close the
AM function. “SURROUND ON” or “SUR- compact disc changer lid.
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio ROUND OFF” will appear on the display. If the malfunction still exists, take your
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear DISC (Compact disc) vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
on the display.
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact  DISC

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal- disc.
ance adjustment function) Use these buttons to select a disc you
When the audio system is set into com- want to listen to.
By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob, pact disc operation, the display shows the
you can adjust the tone and sound bal- Push “” (preset button 3) or “
” (preset
track, or track and disc number currently button 4) until the number of the disc you
ance, and turn on or off the surround being played.
function. want to listen appears on the display.
Each time you push this knob, the mode
Error messages Dolby B NR∗
changes. To adjust the tone and balance If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- If you are listening to a tape that was
and turn on or off the surround function, tem will display one of the six following recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,
turn the knob. error messages.
push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” will
BAS: Adjusts low- pitched tones. The dis- “WAIT”: The compact disc player unit appear on the display. Push the button
play ranges from -5 to 5. may be too hot. Allow the player to cool again to turn off Dolby B NR.
down.
MID: Adjusts mid- pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from -5 to 5. “ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-
aged or inserted incorrectly (up- side
TRE: Adjusts high- pitched tones. The dis- down). Clean the disc and re- insert it.
play ranges from -5 to 5.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise To load multiple compact discs, push and To turn on the RDS, push and hold this
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc- hold the button (until you hear a beep button until you hear a beep and “RDS”
tion, play your tapes with this button on when the audio system is on), then insert will appear on the display. At this time,
or off according to the mode used to re- the first compact disc. After the disc is the radio starts to search the RDS sta-
cord the tape. loaded, the shutter of the slot will close. tions and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on the
∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from After a few seconds, the shutter will auto- display.
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the matically open again so the next disc can Quickly push and release this button when
double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
be inserted. The same process can be the RDS turns on, the radio starts to
applied for loading the rest of the discs. search the RDS stations and “RDS
FM
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL” SEARCH” will flash on the display.
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio will appear on the display.
and select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or When the RDS stations are found,
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter “FOUND” and the number of the RDS sta-
“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.
will close after 15 seconds. tions will appear on the display, and you
This system allows you to set twelve FM
and six RDS stations, three for each of PWR·VOL (Power and Volume) will hear two beeps. The stations will be
the preset button. If the RDS is off or Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system preset to the preset buttons.
RDS stations are not preset to the preset on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the If the RDS stations can not be found, “NO
buttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on the volume. RDS ST” will appear on the display and
display. you will hear a beep, and the display
RDS (Radio Data System)
LOAD returns to the previous mode.
Your audio system is equipped with Radio
This button is used to load the compact Data System (RDS). RDS station providing To turn the RDS off, push the button until
discs in the compact disc player. This good reception is automatically selected if you hear a beep again.
player can store up to six discs. current reception worsens.
To load one compact disc only, quickly The “RDS” button turns the RDS on and
push and release the button, then insert off. This button is operational except in
a compact disc. After the disc is loaded, AM mode.
the shutter of the slot will close.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

210

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

RAND (Random) RPT (Repeat) Repeating a disc:

There are two random features—you can Cassette player Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
either listen to the tracks on one compact Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-
disc in random order, or listen to the pear on the display. The player will repeat
tracks on all the compact discs in the track is playing. “ ” will appear on all the tracks on the disc you are listening
magazine in random order. the display. When the track ends, it will to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically rewind and replay. To turn automatically go back to the first track on
To play the tracks on one disc in random off the repeat feature, push this button
order: the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
again. feature, push this button again.
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank SCAN
button 1). “ ” will appear on the space between tracks in order for the re-
display and the player will perform the peat feature to work correctly. Radio
tracks on the disc you are listening to in You can either scan all the frequencies on
random order. To turn off the random fea- Compact disc player
a band or scan only the preset stations
ture, push this button again. There are two repeat features—You can for that band.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in either replay a disc track or a whole com-
pact disc. To scan the preset stations:
random order: Push and hold “
” or “” side of the
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1) Repeating a track: “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. The
until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap- Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset radio will tune in the next preset station
pear on the display and the player will button 2) while the track is playing. up or down the band, stay there for 5
perform all the tracks on all the discs in “ ” will appear on the display. When seconds, and then move to the next pre-
the magazine in random order. To turn off the track ends, it will automatically replay. set station. To stop scanning, push this
the random feature, push this button To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.
again. button again. To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release “
” or “” side
of the “SCAN” button. The radio will find
the next station up or down the station
band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then
scan again to the next station. To stop
scanning, push this button again.

211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Compact disc player SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down) Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei- Radio Use this button to skip up or down to a
ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or In the seek mode, the radio finds and different track.
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the plays the next station up or down the Push “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/
magazine. station band. TRACK” button until the number of the
Scanning the tracks on a disc: To seek the next station, quickly push and track you want to listen to appears on the
Quickly push and release “
” or “” side release “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/ display. If you want to return to the begin-
of the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear TRACK” button. Do this again to find the ning of the current track, quickly push the
on the display and the player will scan up station after that. down side of the button one time.
or down all the tracks on the disc you are ST (Stereo reception) display
listening to. To stop scanning, push this Cassette Player
button again. If the player scanned all the Use this button to skip up or down to Your radio automatically changes to stereo
tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning. locate a song or recording. reception when a stereo broadcast is re-
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the
Scanning the first tracks of all the discs You can select up to nine recordings (in- signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
in the magazine: cluding current one). the amount of channel separation to prev-
Push “
” or “” side of the “SCAN” but- A blank space of at least 3 seconds is ent the weak signal from creating noise.
ton until you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will considered to be a start of a recording. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
appear on the display and the player will When the beginning of a tape is reached, radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
scan up or down the first track of the the player automatically resumes play. tion.
next disc. To stop scanning, push this TAPE
button again. If the auto changer has When the end of the tape is reached, the
scanned all the discs, it will stop scan- player automatically reverses sides and Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
ning. resumes normal play. tape.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.

212

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TEXT If no messages have been stored, or if TRAF (Traffic)

Radio there are no more messages to be re- This button turns the traffic announcement
called, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on the (TA) feature on and off. This button is
This button is operational only in RDS display, and the message display will be
mode. operational only in FM mode.
canceled.
By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAF
When an RDS radio station transmits a The message display will be canceled if SEEK” will flash on the display and the
text message, “TEXT” will be displayed. At you activate any function that affects the radio will start seeking any traffic program
this time, push the “TEXT” button to view display. station.
the text message. The message display
will be canceled if any button that affects Compact disc player When a traffic program station is found,
the display is pushed. To view the mes- This button is used to change the display “TRAF” will be displayed and you will hear
sage again, push this button again. After for the compact disc that contains text a beep.
the entire message has been displayed, data. After the traffic announcement program is
the message will disappear. To change the display, quickly push and over, the display returns to the previous
The RDS audio system has memory to release the “TEXT” button while the com- mode.
store three 64- character messages. To pact disc is playing. The display changes If no traffic program station is found, “NO
store a message in memory, push and in the order from the elapsed time to disc TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a
hold the “TEXT” button until you hear a title to track title, then back to the few seconds and the display returns to
beep. elapsed time. the previous mode.
If three messages are already stored in If this button is pushed while a compact To cancel the traffic announcement, push
memory, the oldest message will be over- disc that does not contain text data is this button again.
written by the new message. playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the TUNE (Tuning)
To recall a radio text message, push the display.
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
“TEXT” button momentarily. This will dis- If the entire disc or track title does not up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-
play the most recent message. Each push appear on the display, push and hold the clockwise to step down the frequency.
of the button will display messages in the button until you hear a beep. The rest of
order of most to least recent. the title will appear.

213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the “TYPE” button while
receiving an RDS station, the current pro-
gram type appears on the display.
Each time you push this button, the pro-
gram type changes as in the following:
 ROCK
 EASY LIS (Easy listening)
 CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
 R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
 INFORM (Information)
 RELIGION
 MISC (Miscellaneous)
 ALERT (Emergency message)

214

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steer-
ing wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Volume control switch
2. “
” switch
3. “MODE” switch

215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1. Volume control switch Next, push either side of the track switch There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol- until the track you want to listen to is set. space between tracks for the track switch
ume continues to increase while the If you push the switch ten times, the skip to work correctly. In addition, the feature
switch is being pushed. function will turn off. (You can skip up to may not work well with some spoken, live,
nine tracks at a time.) or classical recordings.
Push “- ” to decrease the volume. The
volume continues to decrease while the When counting the number of the tracks To fast forward or reverse:
switch is being pushed. you want to rewind, remember to count Push and hold the “
” side of the switch
the current track as well. For example, if to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” will
2. “
” switch you want to rewind to a song that is two appear on the display. Push and hold the
Radio tracks before the song you are listening “” side of the switch to rewind a tape.
This switch has the following features— to, push the “” side of the switch three “REW” will appear on the display.
times. To stop the tape while it is fast forward-
To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “
” or “” If you push the track switch further than ing, push the “
” side of the switch. To
side of the switch. Do this again to select you wanted to, push the other side of the stop the tape while it is rewinding, push
the next preset station. switch. The track number will be in- the “” side of the switch.
creased or reduced. If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
To seek a station:
Push and hold the “
” or “” side of the The track number you select is not valid player will stop and then play that same
switch until you hear a beep. Do this if it is higher than the number of the side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
again to find the next station. If you push tracks remaining on the current side of the cassette will play the other side of the
the switch on either side during the seek the cassette. tape using the auto- reverse feature.
mode, seeking will be cancelled.  When the tape reaches to the begin- Compact disc player
Cassette player ning, the player will automatically start Use this switch to skip up or down to a
playing that side. different track in either direction.
This switch has the following features—
 After the tape reaches to the end, the Quickly push and release the “
” or “”
To skip to a different track in either direc- player will automatically reverse and
tion: side of the switch until the track you want
start playing the other side. to listen to is set. If you want to return
Quickly push and release the “
” or “”
side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will to the beginning of the current track, push
appear on the display. the “” side of the switch once, quickly.

216

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear seat audio system—

With compact disc changer only— The rear seat audio system is designed The wireless headphone can be used with-
Push and hold the “
” or “” side of the for the rear seat passengers to enjoy the in a radius of approximately 7 m (23 ft.)
switch until the disc you want to listen to audio sound separately between the front from the rear seat audio system. If the
is set. seats and rear seats. signal becomes weak, the headphone will
The rear seat audio system can be turned mute.
3. “MODE” switch
on with the rear audio system controller You can purchase a wireless headphone
Push the “MODE” switch to select an au- even if the front audio system is off. at a Toyota dealer.
dio mode. Each push changes the mode When the front audio is turned off, the
sequentially if the desired mode is ready rear audio system will be turned off simul- CAUTION
to use. taneously.
To turn the audio system on, push the The rear passengers can enjoy all the Do not operate a motor vehicle while
“MODE” switch. modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape using headphones. Doing so may
To turn the audio system off, push and player, compact disc player and compact cause an accident, resulting in injury.
hold the “MODE” switch until the system disc player with changer) with the rear
turns off. seat audio system when a cassette tape
and discs are loaded in the front audio
system.
When the same mode is selected on the
front and rear audio systems at the same
time, the system can be operated on the
front audio system.
If the radio mode is selected on the front
and rear audio systems at the same time,
AM and FM modes cannot be changed on
the rear seat audio system.
You can enjoy the rear seat audio system
with a special headphone. For details, re-
fer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Rear seat audio system

controller
The rear seat audio system consists of The rear seat audio system can be oper-
following components. ated with the rear seat audio system con-
1. Front audio system troller.

2. Rear seat audio system display

CAUTION
3. Rear seat audio system controller
4. Controller holder Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.

NOTICE
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to ex-
plode or leak.

218

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat audio system con-
troller, direct the signal output portion
of the controller to the signal reception
portion of the rear seat audio system
display.
The rear seat audio system controller can
be operated when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.
BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER Details of specific buttons, controls, and
(for new vehicle owners) features of the controller, see
A battery is already set in the control- “CONTROLLER FEATURES” on page 221
ler with an insulating sheet, which pre- in this Section.
vents the battery from being dis-
charged. Before using the controller, NOTICE
remove the insulating sheet.
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.

Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.

Do not sit on or place heavy ob-
jects on the controller.

219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

NOTICE
Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on the
instrument panel) for a long time,
otherwise the controller may be dam-
aged.

CONTROLLER HOLDER
The controller can be stowed in the
holder when it is not in use. The holder
can be hooked on the back of the driv-
er’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the holder when it is not in use.

220

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CONTROLLER FEATURES 1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but- Compact disc player

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons tons With compact disc changer only—
2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons Radio Use these buttons to select the disc you
You can scan only the preset stations for want to listen to.
3. “ON/SOURCE” button
the band of the front audio system. (For Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
4. “OFF” button instructions, see “—Controls and features” button until the number of the disc you
on page 201 in this Section.) want to listen to appears on the display.
To scan the preset stations: 2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) Radio
button. The radio will tune in the next
preset station up or down the band. The Use the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-
station frequency will appear on the dis- ton to tune or seek.
play. Tuning:
Cassette tape player Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) (TUNE/TRACK) button briefly. Each time
button to select the other side of a cas- you push the button, the radio will step up
sette tape. The display indicates which or down to another frequency. If you push
side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates and hold the button and the radio will go
the top side, “ ” indicates the bottom into the seek mode.
side.) Seeking:
Auto- reverse feature: After the cassette Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
player reaches the end of a tape side, it TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or
automatically reverses and begins to play down for a station of the nearest frequen-
the other side. This is true whether the cy and will stop on reception. Each time
cassette was playing or fast forwarding. you push the button, the stations will be
searched automatically one after another.

221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Cassette tape player In addition, the feature may not work well Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
To fast forward a cassette tape, push and with some spoken, live, or classical re- in the changer:
hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until cordings. Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
“FF” will appears on the display. Push and Compact disc player TRACK) button. The player will scan the
hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until first track of the next disc. To stop scan-
Use this button to skip up or down to a ning, release the button. If the player has
“REW” appears on the display to rewind different track.
a tape. scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but- ning.
Use this button to skip up or down to ton until the number of the track you want
locate a song or recording. 3. “ON/SOURCE” button
to listen to appears on the display. If you
You can select up to nine recordings (in- want to return to the beginning of the Push the “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on
cluding current one). current track, quickly push the “ ” the rear seat audio system.
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but- (TUNE/TRACK) button one time. Use the “ON/SOURCE” button to select an
ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/ audio mode when the rear seat audio sys-
display. TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse tem is on. Each time you push this but-
within a disc. When you release the but- ton, the system changes between the ra-
Next, push either side of the track button dio, cassette player, compact disc player
until the number on the display reaches ton, the compact disc player will resume
playing. and compact disc changer.
the number of tracks you want to skip. If
you push the button 10 times, the skip With compact disc changer only— When you change the mode, the display
feature will be turned off. You can either scan the tracks on a spe- indicates which mode is selected.
For the skip feature to work correctly a cific disc or scan the first tracks of all the When a cassette tape and discs are not
blank space of at least 3 seconds is con- discs in the changer. loaded in the front audio system, only a
sidered to be a start of a recording. Scanning the tracks on a disc: radio mode can be selected in the rear
Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ” seat audio system.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play. (TUNE/TRACK) button. “LOAD” will appear
on the display and the player will scan all
When the end of the tape is reached, the the tracks on the disc you are listening to.
player automatically reverses sides and To stop scanning, push this button again.
resumes normal play. If the player scanned all the tracks on the
disc, it will stop scanning.

222

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If you push the “ON/SOURCE” button on Tape mode “OPEN”: The compact disc changer lid of
rear seat audio system controller to select “TAPE” appears on the display while this separate unit is open. Close the compact
the casette tape player mode or disc play- mode is selected. disc changer lid.
er mode in that case, a beep sounds from If the malfunction still exists, take your
front audio system and “INVALID” flashes Compact disc mode
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
on the display for 6 seconds, and then the “CD” appears on the display while this
rear audio system returns to the radio mode is selected. 4. “OFF” button
mode. The display shows the track, or track and Push the “OFF” button to turn off the rear
If you push the “ON/SOURCE” button disc number currently being played. seat audio system.
while receiving an emergency broadcast, Error messages
a beep sounds and “INVALID” appears on
the display to indicate that no button can If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-
be operated. tem will display one of the five following
error messages.
Radio
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
AM mode may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
When you select the AM mode, “AM” will down.
appear on the display. “ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged
FM mode or inserted incorrectly (up- side down).
When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or Clean the disc and re- insert it.
“FM2” will appear on the display. “ERR 2”: The compact disc changer of
If the front audio system receives a traffic separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
announcement (TA) while the rear seat “ERR 3”: There is a problem inside the
audio system is in the radio mode, system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set
“TRAF” will flash on the display and the the disc or magazine again.
rear seat audio system will turn off. When “ERR 4”: Over- current. Ask your Toyota
the front audio receives a traffic an- dealer to inspect.
nouncement (TA), the rear seat audio sys-
tem cannot select the AM/FM mode.

223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that

small children do not swallow the re-
moved battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the battery, be care-
ful not to lose the components. Replace the battery by using the following 2. Remove the discharged battery.

Replace only with the same or procedures: 3. Put a new battery with the positive (+)
equivalent type of battery recom- 1. Pull the case out while pushing the side up.
mended by a Toyota dealer. lock release button to the side. Put in the case securely.

Dispose of used batteries according
to the local regulations.

224

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Audio system operating hints

Here are some common reception prob-
NOTICE NOTICE
lems that probably do not indicate a prob-

Make sure that the positive side of To ensure correct audio system op- lem with your radio:
the controller battery is facing cor- erations: FM
rectly.
Be careful not to spill beverages Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the

Do not replace the battery with wet over the audio system. effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
hands. Water may cause rust.
Do not put anything other than a miles). Once outside this range, you may

Do not touch or move any compo- cassette tape or compact disc into notice fading and drifting, which increase
nents inside of the controller, or it the slot. with the distance from the radio transmit-
may interfere with proper operation. ter. They are often accompanied by distor-

The use of a cellular phone inside
tion.

Be careful not to bend the electrode or near the vehicle may cause a
of the controller battery insertion noise from the speakers of the au- Multi- path—FM signals are reflective,
and that dust or oil does not ad- dio system. This does not indicate making it possible for two signals to reach
here to the transmitter case. a malfunction. your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each oth-

Close the battery case securely.
er out, causing a momentary flutter or
RADIO RECEPTION
loss of reception.
After replacing the battery, check that the Usually, a problem with radio reception
Static and fluttering—These occur when
controller operates properly. If the control- does not mean there is a problem with
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
ler still does not operate properly, contact your radio—it is just the normal result of
other large objects. Increasing the bass
your Toyota dealer. conditions outside the vehicle.
level may reduce static and fluttering.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
Station swapping—If the FM signal you
can interfere with FM reception. Power
are listening to is interrupted or weak-
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
ened, and there is another strong station
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
have a limited range. The farther you are
tune in the second station until the origi-
from a station, the weaker its signal will
nal signal can be picked up again.
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.

225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

AM Use high- quality cassettes. CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by  Low- quality cassette tapes can cause PLAYER AND DISCS
the upper atmosphere—especially at night. many problems, including poor sound,  Your compact disc player is intended
These reflected signals can interfere with inconsistent playing speed, and for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
those received directly from the radio sta- constant auto- reversing. They can also  Extremely high temperatures can keep
tion, causing the radio station to sound get stuck or tangled in the cassette your compact disc player from working.
alternately strong and weak. player. On hot days, use the air conditioning
Station interference—When a reflected sig-  Do not use a cassette if it has been to cool the vehicle interior before you
nal and a signal received directly from a damaged or tangled or if its label is listen to a disc.
radio station are very nearly the same peeling off.  Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
frequency, they can interfere with each  Do not leave a cassette in the player cause your compact disc player to
other, making it difficult to hear the broad- if you are not listening to it, especially skip.
cast. if it is hot outside.  If moisture gets into your compact disc
Static—AM is easily affected by external  Store cassettes in their cases and out player, you may not hear any sound
sources of electrical noise, such as high of direct sunlight. even though your compact disc player
tension power lines, lightening, or electri- appears to be working. Remove the
cal motors. This results in static.  Avoid using cassettes with a total play-
ing time longer than 100 minutes (50 disc from the player and wait until it
CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER minutes per side). The tape used in dries.
AND TAPES these cassettes is thin and could get
For the best performance for your cas- stuck or tangled in the cassette player. CAUTION
sette player and tapes:
Compact disc players use an invisible
Clean the tape head and other parts regu-
laser beam which could cause hazard-
larly.
ous radiation exposure if directed
 A dirty tape head or tape path can outside the unit. Be sure to operate
decrease sound quality and tangle your the player correctly.
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)

226

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Special shaped discs Low quality discs

 Use only compact discs marked as
shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy- protected CD
CD- R (CD- Recordable)
CD- RW (CD- Re- writable)
CD- ROM

Transparent/translucent discs Labeled discs

227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transpar-
ent/translucent, low quality or labeled
discs such as those shown in the il-
lustrations. The use of such discs
may damage the player or changer, or
it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
Correct Wrong

 Handle compact discs carefully, espe- To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
cially when you are inserting them. soft, lint- free cloth that has been damp-
Hold them on the edge and do not ened with water. Wipe in a straight line
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints from the center to the edge of the disc
on them, particularly on the shiny side. (not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
 Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or lint- free cloth. Do not use a conventional
other disc damage could cause the record cleaner or anti- static device.
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)
 Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.

228

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 9
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Instrument panel and rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Controls (without “DUAL” button)

1. Fan speed selector
2. “AUTO” button
3. Temperature selector
4. “A/C” button
5. Air flow selector
6. Air intake selector
7. “OFF” button

230

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“AUTO” button Temperature selector

For automatic operation of the air condi- To increase the temperature, push the
tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi- “UP” side, to decrease it, push the
cator light will illuminate to show that the “DOWN” side.
automatic operation mode has been se- “LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-
lected. mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
In the automatic operation mode, the air adjust to maximum warming.
conditioning selects the most suitable fan “OFF” button
speed, air flow, air intake and on- off of
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
the air conditioning according to the tem-
conditioning system.
perature.
When you push the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum Air flow selector
cooling. Push one of the buttons to select the
You may use manual controls if you want vents used for air flow. An indicator light
to select your own settings. will illuminate to show which air flow
Fan speed selector mode is being selected.
Select the mode button you desire to ad- In automatic operation, you do not have
just the fan speed and push it. An indica- to select the air flow unless you desire
tor light will illuminate to show which fan another air flow mode.
speed mode is being selected. 1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument
In automatic operation, you do not have panel vents and rear vents.
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire 2. Bi- level—Air flows from both the floor
another fan speed mode. vents, the instrument panel vents and
rear vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly “A/C” button

from the floor vents and windshield To turn on the air conditioning, push the
vents. “A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the will come on. To turn the air conditioning
windshield vents. off, push the button again.
When this button is pressed, air flows If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
mainly from the windshield vents and is a problem in the air conditioning system
turns on the defogging function with the and the air conditioning automatically
purpose of clearing the front view. shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
Pressing this button once again returns hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.
the air flow mode to the last one used.
This button allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly. Air intake selector
If you want to return the setting to Push the button to select the air source.
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in- An indicator light will illuminate to show
take selector button once again. which the air source is being selected.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified 1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
heating or cooling. This setting clears the vehicle.
the front view more quickly.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-
For details about air flow selector settings, tem.
see “Air flow selector settings” described To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
below.
the air intake mode may change automati-
cally to FRESH depending on the condi-
tion of the air conditioning system.

232

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Controls (with “DUAL” button)

1. Fan speed selector
2. Temperature selector
(at the independent mode: for driver)
(at the linked mode: for driver and
front passenger)
3. “AUTO” button
4. “DUAL” button
5. Temperature selector
(for front passenger)
6. Air flow selector
7. Air intake selector
8. “A/C” button
9. “OFF” button

233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“AUTO” button Temperature selector

For automatic operation of the air condi- To increase the temperature, push the “
”
tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi- side, to decrease it, push the “” side.
cator light will illuminate to show that the “LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-
automatic operation mode has been se- mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
lected. adjust to maximum warming.
In the automatic operation mode, the air “DUAL” button
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
This button is used to set the tempera-
speed, air flow, air intake and on- off of
tures independently for the driver’s seat
the air conditioning according to the tem-
and front passenger seat.
perature.
Pushing the button changes the mode
When you push the “AUTO” button with
from independent and linked.
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum Independent mode: Temperatures can be Air flow selector
cooling. set independently for the driver’s seat and
Push one of the buttons to select the
front passenger’s seat. An indicator light
You may use manual controls if you want vents used for air flow. An indicator light
will illuminated to show that the indepen-
to select your own settings. will illuminate to show which air flow
dent mode has been selected.
Fan speed selector mode is being selected.
Linked mode: The same temperature is
Select the mode button you desire to ad- In automatic operation, you do not have
set for the driver’s seat and front passen-
just the fan speed and push it. An indica- ger’s seat. to select the air flow unless you desire
tor light will illuminate to show which fan another air flow mode.
When the temperature for the front pas-
speed mode is being selected. senger’s seat is changed in linked mode,
In automatic operation, you do not have the mode is changed automatically to in-
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire dependent mode.
another fan speed mode. “OFF” button
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
conditioning system.

234

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument For details about air flow selector settings,
panel vents and rear vents. see “Air flow selector settings” described
2. Bi- level—Air flows from both the floor below.
vents, the instrument panel vents and
rear vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.
When this button is pressed, air flows
Air intake selector
mainly from the windshield vents and
turns on the defogging function with the Push the button to select the air source.
purpose of clearing the front view. An indicator light will illuminate to show
which the air source is being selected.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used. 1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
This button allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to 2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-
clean up the front view more quickly. tem.
If you want to return the setting to To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in- the air intake mode may change automati-
take selector button once again. cally to FRESH depending on the condi-
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified tion of the air conditioning system.
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, push the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, push the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

236

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Air flow selector settings Operating tips

To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate through-
out the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-
hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting.

237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If following another vehicle on a dusty Heating Air conditioning

road, or driving in windy and dusty For best results, set controls as follows: For best results, set controls as follows:
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to For automatic operation— For automatic operation—
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the Press in the “AUTO” button. Press in the “AUTO” button.
outside passage and prevent outside Temperature—To the desired Temperature—To the desired
air and dust from entering the vehicle temperature temperature
interior. Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF Air conditioning—ON
For manual operation— For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards WARM Temperature—Towards COLD
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF Air conditioning—ON

For quick heating, select recirculated
For quick cooling, select recirculated
air for a few minutes. To keep the air for a few minutes.
windows from fogging, select fresh af-
ter the vehicle interior has been war-
med.

Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-
fied heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

238

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Ventilation Defogging and defrosting Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
For best results, set controls as follows: —The inside of the windshield heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.
For automatic operation— For best results, set controls as follows:

On humid days, do not blow cold air
Press in the “AUTO” button. —For automatic operation on the windshield—the difference be-
Temperature—Towards low temperature Temperature—Towards high temperature tween the outside and inside tempera-
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) to heat; low temperature tures could make the fogging worse.
Air conditioning—OFF to cool —The outside of the windshield
For manual operation— Air intake—FRESH (outside air) For best results, set controls as follows:
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed —For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards COLD —For manual operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL Temperature—Towards high temperature Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Air conditioning—OFF to heat; low temperature
to cool —For manual operation
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Air flow—WINDSHIELD Temperature—Towards high temperature
Pressing the windshield air flow button Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
turns on the defogging function with the Air flow—WINDSHIELD
purpose of clearing the front view.
When pressing the windshield air flow but-
ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-
matically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RE-
CIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.

239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Instrument panel and rear

vents
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
When pressing the windshield air flow but-
ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-
matically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RE-
CIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.
Center vents Rear vents

To heat the vehicle interior while de-
frosting the windshield, choose
floor/windshield air flow. If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel and rear vents. The
instrument panel and rear vents may be
opened or closed as shown.

Side vents

240

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Checking and replacing the

Air conditioning filter— air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter may clog af-
ter long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air condi-
tioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance sched-
ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy
traffic flow, such as inner city or desert
areas, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-
The air conditioning filter information The air conditioning filter is behind the nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
label is placed on the upper right side glove box. ment”.)
of the glove box as shown and indi-
cates that a filter has been installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.

241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

1. Open the glove box. Remove the 2. Push in each side of the glove box 3. Remove the filter case by holding
screw with a Phillips- head screw- to disconnect the claws. both sides.
driver and slide the hook as shown.

242

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed prop-
erly in position. The use of air condi-
tioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof per-
formance and then affect air condi-
tioning performance.

4. Remove the filter from the filter

case.
5. Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is the just moderately dusty, it may
be cleaned by blowing compressed air
from the reverse surface. Do not wash or
oil the filter.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.
When setting the filter to the filter case,
ensure that the flat side of the filter is
down and the ribbed side is up.
Position the filter case so that the “↑UP”
mark is pointing up and install it in the
vehicle.

243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

244

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 1- 10
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Multi- information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Rear view monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tissue box holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Coin holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Trash holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Front cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Rear cup holders and tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Rear cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tie- down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Grocery bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Cargo net hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Double deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Roof luggage carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Multi- information display—

1. “RESET” button
2. “MODE” button
3. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”
button—Cruise information display
Air conditioning system with “DUAL”
button—Outside temperature and cruise
information display
4. Clock
5. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”
button only—Outside temperature
display
6. “:00” button
7. “M” button
8. “H” button

246

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Outside temperature display

—Before using the (air conditioning system
multi- information display —Clock without “DUAL” button)
Operate the multi- information display
with the ignition switch on.
When the ignition switch is turned to
“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-
played just before the ignition switch is
turned off will appear.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the multi- information
display, the display will automatically be
set to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the To reset the hour: Push the “H” button. The displayed temperature ranges from
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button. - 30C (- 22F) up to 50C (122F).
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped. If quick adjustment to a full hour is de- The key must be in the “ON” position.
sired, push the “:00” button. If an abnormality exists in the connection
For example, if the “:00” button is de- of the outside air temperature sensor,
pressed when the time is between “- - C” (“- - F”) will appear on the display.
1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00. If “- - C” (“- - F”) appears on the display,
If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the contact your Toyota dealer.
time will change to 2:00. There may be a case that “- - C” (“- - F”)
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” appears momentarily when the ignition is
position. quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it
If the electrical power source has been goes out soon.
disconnected from the clock, the time dis-
play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).

247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Cruise information display

The outside temperature display (air 1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE C”
conditioning system with “DUAL” but- or “OUTSIDE F”)
ton) and cruise information display indi- The displayed value is updated every 1
cates the following information. second.
Every time you push the “MODE” but- The displayed temperature ranges from
ton, the display toggles through this - 30C (- 22F) up to 50C (122F).
Air conditioning system with
“DUAL” button only— information.
If an abnormality exists in the connection
1. Outside temperature of the outside air temperature sensor,
2. Driving range “- - C” (“- - F”) will appear on the display.
3. Average fuel consumption If “- - C” (“- - F”) appears on the display,
contact your Toyota dealer.
4. Average vehicle speed
There may be a case that “- - C” (“- - F”)
5. Display off appears momentarily when the ignition is
The displayed values in the cruise infor- quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it
mation display indicate general driving goes out soon.
conditions. Accuracy varies with driving
habits and road conditions.

248

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Compass
2. Driving range 3. Average fuel consumption
(“RANGE MI” or “RANGE km”) (“AVG. MPG” or “AVG. L/100 km”)
The distance the vehicle can travel with Average fuel consumption is calculated
the remaining fuel is calculated and and displayed based on total driving
displayed based on the quantity of re- distance and total fuel consumption
maining fuel and past fuel consumption. with the engine running.
The driving range display indicates the The displayed value is updated about ev-
approximate distance that you can drive ery 10 seconds.
until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is To reset the calculation, push the
different from the actual distance traveled. “RESET” button about 1 second.
The displayed value is updated about ev- 4. Average vehicle speed
ery 10 seconds. (“AVG. MPH” or “AVG. km/h”)
Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal- Average vehicle speed is calculated and
culation is reset. The direction is indicated on the inside
displayed based on total driving dis- rear view mirror.
The actual driving range varies with driv- tance and total driving time with the
ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con- engine running. If the ignition switch was turned off with
sumption is good, the driving range will be the system on, the system will automati-
The displayed value is updated about ev-
longer than indicated. If fuel consumption cally turn back on when the ignition switch
ery 10 seconds.
is poor, the driving range will be shorter is turned on.
than indicated. To reset the calculation, push the Push the “COMP” switch to turn the com-
“RESET” button about 1 second.
If the low fuel level warning light comes pass system on and off.
on, refuel the vehicle even if the display
indicates that the vehicle can be driven
further.

249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The compass indicates the direction  The vehicle is in a place where the
that the vehicle is heading. In the earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
above case, it shows that the vehicle is terference by artificial magnetic fields
heading north. (underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
Displays Directions near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
N North etc.).
NE Northeast  The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
E East magnet or a metal object on or near
SE Southeast the inside rear view mirror.)
S South
 The battery has been disconnected.
SW Southwest
W West If your vehicle is out of the set zone,
NW Northwest refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”
Compass sensor
below to set the zone number.
The compass may not show the correct
If the deviation is small, the compass
direction in the following conditions: The compass sensor is on the wind-
works to calibrate the direction automati-
 The vehicle is stopped immediately af- cally while the vehicle is in motion.
shield.
ter turning.
For additional precision or for complete NOTICE
 The compass does not adjust while the calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE
vehicle is stopped. COMPASS” below. Do not put magnets or a metal object
 The ignition switch is turned off imme- on or near the inside rear view mirror
diately after turning. of the vehicle. Doing this may cause
malfunction of the compass sensor.
 The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

250

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation

calibration)
The direction display on the compass
deviates from the true direction deter-
mined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
angle of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,
then push and hold the “COMP” switch
until the zone number appears on the dis-
play. Then push the “COMP” switch, refer-
ring to the following map to select the
number of the zone where the vehicle is.

251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

After calibration, leaving the system for

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8 several seconds returns it to the compass
mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

Zone number

252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Perform circling calibration just after

you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, re-
placed or disconnected.
 Do not perform circling calibration of
the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
terference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5

 During calibration, do not operate elec-
calibration) mph) or less. If there is not enough space tric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with
Sometimes the direction display on the to drive in a circle, drive around the
the calibration.
compass may not change after a turn. To block.
rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above
hold the “COMP” switch until “C” appears method, calibration is completed when the
on the display. direction is shown on the display.
If “C” appears on the display because of If calibration cannot be performed because
a drastic change in the magnetic field, of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your
perform circling calibration. vehicle to Toyota dealer.

253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system assists
CAUTION the driver by displaying images of the  Never back up while looking only at
rear of the vehicle during backing up. the screen. The image on the
 When doing the circling calibration, The displayed image on the screen is screen may differ from actual con-
be sure to secure a wide space, a horizontally reversed mirror image of ditions. If you back up while look-
and watch out for people and ve- the inside rear view mirror. ing only at the screen, you may hit
hicles in the neighborhood. Do not a vehicle or have an unexpected
To display the rear view on the screen, accident. When backing up, be sure
violate any local traffic rules while
place the selector lever in the “R” posi-
performing circling calibration. to check behind and all around the
tion when the ignition switch in the
 Do not adjust the display while the “ON” position.
vehicle visually and with mirrors
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust before proceeding.
If you move the selector lever out of the
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped. “R” position, the screen returns to the
previous screen. Operating another func- NOTICE
tion of the navigation system will display
another screen.
Do not use the system when the
back door is not completely closed.
The rear view monitor system is an auxil-
iary device intended to back up. When
If the back of the vehicle is hit, the
backing up, be sure to check behind and position and mounting angle of the
all around the vehicle visually. camera may slip. Be sure to have
the camera’s position and mounting
angle checked at your Toyota deal-
CAUTION
er.
 Do not rely entirely on the rear
If the temperature changes rapidly,
view monitor system. such as when hot water is poured
on it in cold weather, the system
Use caution just as you would when
may not operate normally.
backing up any vehicle.

254

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it
cannot transmit a clear image. If Image is displayed approximately level
water droplets, snow, or mud ad- on screen.
here to the lens, rinse with water  The area detected by the camera is
and wipe with a soft cloth. If the limited. The camera does not detect
lens is extremely dirty, wash with a objects which are close to either
mild cleanser and rinse. corner of the bumper or under the

Use your own eyes to assure safety bumper.
as the displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the display
is cold.

On screen

Corners of bumper

255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The distance that appears on the

screen between three- dimensional ob-
jects (such as vehicles) and flat sur-
faces (such as the road) and the actual
distance differ as follows.
In reality, A=B<C (A and B are equally far
away; C is farther than A and B). Howev-
er, on the screen, the situation appears to
be B<C<A. In reality if you back up to
point B, you will hit the truck.

 The area displayed on the screen

may vary according to vehicle status
or road conditions.

On screen

256

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

When water droplets are adhering to

the camera, or when humidity is high
(for example, when it rains)
When foreign matter (for example,
mud) is adhering to the camera
When the sun or the beam of head-
lights is shining directly into the cam-
era lens

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM  If a bright light (for example, sunlight
CAMERA reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
 The rear view monitor system camera up by the camera, the smear effect∗
is located on the back door as shown peculiar to the CCD camera may occur.
in the illustration. ∗: Smear effect—A phenomenon that oc-
 The rear view monitor system camera curs when a bright light (for example, sun-
uses a special lens. The distance of light reflected off the vehicle body) is
the images that appear on the screen picked up by the camera; when trans-
differs from the actual distance. mitted by the camera, the light source
appears to have a vertical streak above
 In the following cases, it may become and below it.
difficult to see the images on the
screen, but this is not a malfunction.
In the dark (for example, at night)
When the temperature near the lens is
high or low

257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Power outlet (12 VDC)

NOTICE

To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of 12
VDC/120W.

To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting anything other than an ap-
Luggage compartment
propriate plug that fits the outlet,
or allowing any liquid to get into
The power outlets are designed for the outlet may cause electrical fail-
power supply for car accessories. ure or short circuits.
In the rear console box—To use the
power outlet, push the lid of the auxil-
iary box to open.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position for the power outlet to be used.

Rear console box

258

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Power outlet (115 VAC)

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
anything other than an appropriate
plug that fits the outlet may cause
electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for

This power outlet is designed for use To use the power outlet, push the main the following electric appliances even
as a power supply for electric ap- switch on the instrument panel. though their power consumption is un-
pliances in the vehicle. der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate may not operate properly.
The key must be in the “ON” position for that the power outlet is ready for use.
the power outlet to be used. Push the main switch once again to turn
The maximum capacity for this power out- the power outlet off. When the power out-
let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to let is not in use, make sure that the main
use an appliance that requires more than switch is turned off.
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Glove box
 Appliances with high initial peak watt-
age: cathode- ray tube type televisions,
compressor- driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.
 Measuring devices which process pre-
cise data: medical equipment, measur-
ing instruments, etc.
 Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply: microcomputer-
controlled electric blankets, touch sen-
sor lamps, etc.
Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.
To use the glove box:
Open by pulling the lever.
Lock by inserting the master key and turn-
ing it clockwise.
Unlock by inserting the master key and
turning it counterclockwise.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
glove box light will come on.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.

260

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Garage door opener

On some models, an auxiliary box is (a) Programming the HomeLink
Indicator light
located inside the glove box. The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3
To increase the capacity of the glove box, buttons and you can store one program
raise the lower panel of the auxiliary box. for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLink, install a new battery in the
hand- held transmitter prior to program-
ming.
The battery side of the hand- held trans-
mitter must be pointed away from the
Buttons
HomeLink during the programming pro-
cess.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
The garage door opener ( 
in “Programming an entrance gate/pro-
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured gramming all devices in the Canadian
under license from HomeLink and can market”.
be programmed to operate garage 1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, you want to program.
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Home Link

25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.)

Hand- held
garage
transmitter

2. Place your hand- held garage transmit- 3. Simultaneously press and hold the 5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from hand- held garage transmitter button pressing the newly programmed button.
the surface of the HomeLink. along with the selected HomeLink but- If programming a garage door opener,
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink ton. check to see if the garage door opens
in view while programming. Do not release the buttons until step 4 and closes.
has been completed. If the garage door does not operate, iden-
4. When the indicator light on the tify if your garage transmitter is of the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can programmed HomeLink button. The ga-
release both buttons. rage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code sys-
tem”.

262

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re- The ceiling mounted garage door opener 6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
maining HomeLink button to program motor should now recognize the pressing the newly programmed button.
another device. HomeLink unit and be able activate the Check to see if the gate/device oper-
Programming a rolling code system garage door up/down. ates correctly.
If your device is “Rolling Code” 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re- 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-
equipped, it is necessary to follow maining HomeLink button to program maining HomeLink button to program
steps 1 through 4 under the heading another rolling code system. another device.
“Programming the HomeLink” before Programming an entrance gate/program- Programming other devices
proceeding with the steps listed below. ming all devices in the Canadian market To program other devices such as home
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil- 1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but- security systems, home door locks or
ing mounted garage door opener motor. tons you want to program. lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
The exact location and color of the 2. Place your hand- held gate/device dealer for assistance.
button may vary by brand of garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) Reprogramming a button
door opener. Refer to the owner’s away from the surface of the Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be
guide supplied by the garage door HomeLink. erased, however, to reprogram a single
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink button, follow the procedure “Programming
in view while programming. the HomeLink”.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-
ing mounted garage door opener motor. 3. Press and hold the selected (b) Operating the HomeLink
HomeLink button. To operate the HomeLink, press the
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below. 4. Continuously press and release (cycle) appropriate HomeLink button to activate
the hand- held gate/device transmitter the programmed device. The HomeLink
3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro- button every two seconds until step 5 indicator light should come on. The
grammed HomeLink button twice. The is complete. HomeLink continues to send the signal
garage door may open. If the door for up to 20 seconds as long as the
does open, the programming process is 5. When the indicator light on the
complete. If the door does not open, HomeLink changes from a slow to a button is pressed.

press and release the button a third rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
time. This third press and release will release both buttons.
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

For additional programming assistance

with your HomeLink Universal CAUTION
Transceiver call the:
 When programming the HomeLink
 The Toyota Customer Experience
Universal Transceiver, you may be
Center at 1- 800- 331- 4331 (U.S.A.)
operating a garage door or other
 Toyota Canada Customer Interaction device. Make sure people and ob-
Centre at 1- 888- 869- 6828 (Canada) jects are out of the way of the ga-
Refer to HomeLink on the internet at: rage door or other device to pre-
WWW.HOMELINK.COM vent potential harm or damage.
 Do not use this HomeLink Univer-
sal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as re-
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink quired by federal safety standards.
memory (all three programs) (This includes any garage door
To erase all previously programmed codes opener model manufactured before
at one time, press and hold down the 2 April 1, 1982.) A garage door open-
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the er which cannot detect an object
indicator light flashes. (signaling the door to stop and re-
verse), does not meet current feder-
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
al safety standards. Using a garage
the programs stored in the HomeLink
door opener without these features
memory.
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

264

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Auxiliary boxes—
To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
This device complies with Part 15 of the lids as shown in the following illustra-
FCC Rules and with RSS- 210 of the IC tions.
Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device CAUTION
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-  To reduce the chance of injury in
ence received, including interference case of an accident or a sudden
that may cause undesired operation. stop, always keep the auxiliary box
WARNING: This transmitter has been closed while driving.
tested and complies with FCC and IC  Type A—As this holder is designed
rules. Changes or modifications not for holding a light object such as
expressly approved by the party re- eyeglasses, do not place any heavy
sponsible for compliance could void objects in them. Heavy objects may Type A (over head console)
the user’s authority to operate the cause the holder to open and the
device. contents to fly out resulting in inju-
ries.

NOTICE
Type A—During hot weather, the inte-
rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses,
etc. inside.

Type B (instrument panel)

265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Using the holding belts

Type C (rear console box) Type E (right side of luggage compart-

ment) The right side of luggage compartment
auxiliary box is equipped with a belt to
hold the objects.
To use the belt, do the following.
1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.
2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.
Make sure the objects are securely held.

Type D (rear tire house)

266

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear console box

CONSOLE BOX TABLE
To use the console box table, open it.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the table closed while
driving.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the table, do
not place any object heavier than 1 CONSOLE BOX
kg (2.20 lb.) on it, and do not leave To access the rear console box, pull up
any object on the table for a long the console box lid while pushing the
time. lock release button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tissue box holder Coin holder

The rear console box is equipped with
a tissue box holder on the inside of the
rear console box lid.
To use the tissue box holder:
1. Pull up the console box lid while push-
ing the lock release button.
2. Place a tissue box in the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, keep the console box
lid closed when it is not in use.

268

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Trash holder
The rear console box is equipped with The trash holder is designed to use the
a coin holder. grocery bag as a trash bag.
To use the coin holder: To use the trash holder:
1. Pull up the console box lid while push- 1. Raise the trash holder.
ing the lock release button. 2. Fit the grocery bag onto the holder by
2. Push coins down into the holder. hanging its handles on the two hooks
The coin holder is detachable. indicated at the left and right.
The trash holder can support to 1 kg
(2.20 lb.).

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, keep the trash holder
closed when it is not in use.

269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Front cup holders

The cup holders are designed for hold-
ing cups or drink- cans securely.
The cup holder can be adjustable to the
size of the cups or drink- cans by
changing the holder position and the
arm position, as shown.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
front cup holder position indicator lights
will come on.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

If the trash holder is pulled strongly or cups or drink- cans in the cup holder,
stepped on, it will detach from the rear as such items may be thrown about
console box to protect it from damag- in the compartment and possibly in-
ing. jured people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.
If the trash holder becomes detached, re-
install it in a horizontal direction as indi-
cated in the illustration. It cannot be
installed in any other direction.

NOTICE
Do not deliberately pull or step on
the trash holder, as it may be dam-
aged or broken.

270

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear cup holders and tray

(vehicles without third seats)
2. To use the rear cup holder, push and
pull it out.

The rear cup holders and tray are

housed in the armrest.
The cup holders are designed to hold
cups or beverage cans securely.
1. To use the rear cup holders and tray,
pull the armrest out.

271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rear cup holders

(vehicles with third seats)
3. To use the tray, pull it out.

CAUTION

 Do not place anything else other

than cups or drink- cans in the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.
 To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, keep the cup holder Type A (armrest)
closed when it is not in use.
 To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the tray closed
while driving.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the tray, do not
place any object heavier than 2 kg
(4.40 lb.) on it, and do not leave any
object on the tray for a long time.

Type B (rear tire house)

272

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Bottle holders
The cup holders are designed for hold- The bottle holders are designed to hold
ing cups or drink- cans securely. bottles securely.
Type A—To use the holder, pull the arm-
rest out and push the lid. CAUTION

CAUTION Do not attempt to use the holder for

any other purpose for which it was
 Do not place anything else other intended. Inappropriately sized or
than cups or drink- cans in the cup shaped objects may be thrown about
holder, as such items may be in the compartment and possibly in-
thrown about in the compartment jure people in the vehicle during a
and possibly injure people in the sudden braking or an accident.
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident. Front doors
NOTICE
 Type A—To reduce the chance of
injury in case of an accident or Do not put a cup or open bottle in
sudden stop while driving, keep the the bottle holder because the con-
cup holder closed when it is not in tents may spill when the door opens
use. or closes.

Rear doors

273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tie- down hooks Grocery bag hooks Cargo net hooks

To secure your luggage, use the tie- These hooks are designed to hang These hooks are designed to hang the
down hooks as shown above. things like grocery bags. cargo net.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 305 To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net
NOTICE
in Section 2 for precautions when loading hooks and rear tie- down hooks.
luggage. To prevent damage to the hook, do Although the cargo net itself is not in-
not hang any object heavier than 1 kg cluded as an original equipment, these
CAUTION (2.20 lb.) in it. hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie- NOTICE

down hooks folded in place on the
floor when not in use. To prevent damage to the hook, avoid
hanging things other than a cargo net
on it.
NOTICE
Do not use the seat anchors instead
of the tie- down hooks.

274

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Luggage cover
USING LUGGAGE COVER
To use the luggage cover:
1. Attach the front hooks of the lug-
gage cover to the head restraint.
2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and
hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggage

cover. Such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in
the vehicle during sudden braking or
a collision. REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER
To remove the luggage cover, detach its
hooks from the head restraint. Then,
retract and release both ends, and re-
move the luggage cover.
After you remove the luggage cover, place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent passengers
from injury in the event of a sudden stop
or accident.

275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Double deck

To use the double deck: 2. Hold the handle and raise the double 3. Turn the left and right knobs from
1. Turn the left and right knobs from deck on the rear tire houses. the “UNLOCK” position to the
the “LOCK” position to the “LOCK” position.
“UNLOCK” position. Make sure the double deck is securely
locked.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop,
make sure that the double deck
knobs are always in the “LOCK” posi-
tion when the double deck is in the
raised or lowered position.

276

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Roof luggage carrier

The roof luggage carrier consists of
NOTICE
roof rails (1) attached to the roof and
When using the double deck at the sliding cross rails (2).
raised position, do not place any ob- To adjust the positions of cross rails, do
ject heavier than 30 kg (66 lb.). this.
1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to
loosen the cross rails.
2. Slide the cross rails to the desired
position for loading the luggages of
various sizes.
3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the
cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions when installing the attach-
ments or their equivalent.
When there is no luggage on the roof
luggage carrier, Toyota recommends that
the front and rear cross rails be secured
in the positions indicated in the illustra-
tion, according to the following procedure.
This may diminish wind noise during driv-
ing.

277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Floor mat

CAUTION  If driving for a long distance, on

rough roads, or at high speeds,
When you load cargo on the roof lug- stop the vehicle now and then dur-
gage carrier, observe the following: ing the trip to make sure the cargo
 Place the cargo so that its weight remains in its place.
is distributed evenly between the  Do not exceed 54 kg (120 lb.) cargo
front and rear axles. weight on the roof luggage carrier.
 If loading long or wide cargo, never
exceed the vehicle overall length or
width. (See “Dimensions and
NOTICE
weights” on page 402 in Section 8 When loading the luggages, be careful
for information on your vehicle not to scratch the surface of the
overall length and width.) moon roof. Use a floor mat of the correct size.
 Before driving, make sure the cargo
is securely fastened on the roof If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2
luggage carrier. holes, then they are designed for use with
locking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-
 Loading cargo on the roof luggage ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.
carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneu-
vers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.

278

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the floor carpet. If the floor
mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driv-
ing, it may cause an accident.

279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

280

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 2
INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Off- road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Break- in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Three- way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Iridium- tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Limited- slip differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Off- road vehicle precautions

This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-
hicle class, which has higher ground CAUTION
clearance and narrower tread in relation
to the height of its center of gravity to Always observe the following precau-
make it capable of performing in a wide tions to minimize the risk of serious
variety of off- road applications. Specific personal injury or damage to your ve-
design characteristics give it a higher hicle:
center of gravity than ordinary passen-
In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
ger cars. This vehicle design feature son is significantly more likely to
causes this type of vehicle to be more die than a person wearing a seat
likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles belt. Therefore, the driver and all
have a significantly higher rollover rate passengers should fasten their seat
than other types of vehicles. An advan- belts whenever the vehicle is mov-
tage of the higher ground clearance is ing.
a better view of the road allowing you

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
to anticipate problems. It is not de-
vers, if at all possible. Failure to
signed for cornering at the same
operate this vehicle correctly may
speeds as ordinary passenger cars any
result in loss of control or vehicle
more than low- slung sports cars de-
rollover causing death or serious
signed to perform satisfactorily under
injury.
off- road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause
Loading cargo on the roof luggage
rollover. carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneu-
vers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.

282

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Break- in period Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds. FUEL TYPE

Always slow down in gusty cross-
Your vehicle does not need an elaborate Your new vehicle must use only un-
winds. Because of its profile and
break- in. But following a few simple tips leaded gasoline.
higher center of gravity, your ve-
hicle is more sensitive to side for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add To help prevent gas station mix- ups, your
to the future economy and long life of Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
winds than an ordinary passenger
your vehicle: The special nozzle on pumps with un-
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have better control.
Avoid full throttle acceleration when leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-
starting and driving. dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will

When driving off- road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive
Avoid racing the engine. not.
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
Try to avoid hard stops during the first At a minimum, the gasoline you use
strike objects, etc. This may cause 300 km (200 miles). should meet the specifications of ASTM
loss of control or vehicle rollover D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5- M93
causing death or serious injury. You
Do not drive for a long time at any in Canada.
single speed, either fast or slow.
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 NOTICE
chassis. km (500 miles).
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of

Do not drive horizontally across leaded gasoline will cause the three-
steep slopes. Driving straight up or way catalytic converter to lose its ef-
straight down is preferred. Your ve- fectiveness and the emission control
hicle (or any similar off- road ve- system to function improperly. Also,
hicle) can tip over sideways much this can increase maintenance costs.
more easily than forward or back-
ward.

283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

OCTANE RATING However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research contains detergent additives to keep clean Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
Octane Number 91) or higher. For and/or clean intake systems. blended gasoline where the oxygenate
improved vehicle performance, the use QUALITY GASOLINE content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
of premium unleaded gasoline with an Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Europe and Japan have developed a Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
Number 96) or higher is recommended. specification for quality fuel named rating no lower than 87.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane World- Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that Toyota does not recommend the use of
rating or research octane number lower is expected to be applied world wide. gasoline containing methanol.
than stated above will cause persistent The WWFC consists of four categories GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will that depend on required emission lev-
lead to engine damage. els. In the U.S., category 4 has been Some gasoline contain an octane en-
adopted. The WWFC improves air quali- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
If your engine knocks... clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
ty by providing for better emissions in
If you detect heavy knocking even when vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction Toyota does not recommend the use of
using the recommended fuel, or if you through better vehicle performance. gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
hear steady knocking while holding a taining MMT is used, your emission con-
steady speed on level roads, consult your CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
trol system may be adversely affected.
Toyota dealer. Cleaner burning gasoline, including re- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-
However, occasionally, you may notice formulated gasoline that contains oxy- strument cluster may come on. If this hap-
light knocking for a short time while accel- genates such as ethanol or MTBE is pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-
erating or driving up hills. This is normal available in many areas. vice.
and there is no need for concern. Toyota recommends the use of cleaner GASOLINE QUALITY
GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gas- In a very few cases, you may experience
ADDITIVES driveability problems caused by the partic-
oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im- ular gasoline that you are using. If you
that contains detergent additives to prove air quality. continue to have unacceptable driveability,
avoid build- up of engine deposits. try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

284

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup- If you plan to drive your Toyota in
NOTICE
plying fuel to the engine to minimize the another country...

Do not use gasohol other than risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls First, comply with the vehicle registration
stated above. It will cause fuel sys- or an airbag inflates upon collision. To laws.
tem damage or vehicle performance restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, turn the ignition Second, confirm the availability of the cor-
problems.
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane

If driveability problems occur (poor number).
it.
hot starting, vaporizing, engine
knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
CAUTION

Take care not to spill gasohol dur-
ing refueling. Gasohol may cause Inspect the ground under the vehicle
paint damage. before restarting the engine. If you
find that liquid has leaked onto the
FUEL TANK CAPACITY ground, it is the fuel system has
87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.) been damaged and it is in need of
repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.

285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Three- way catalytic converters

NOTICE
Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
A large amount of unburned gases
electrical system, electronic ignition
flowing into the three- way catalytic system/distributor ignition system
converter may cause it to overheat
or fuel systems could cause an ex-
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
tremely high three- way catalytic
this and other damage, observe the converter temperature.
following precautions:

If the engine becomes difficult to

Use only unleaded gasoline.
start or stalls frequently, take your

Do not drive with an extremely low vehicle in for a check- up as soon
fuel level; running out of fuel could as possible. Remember, your Toyota
cause the engine to misfire, creat- dealer knows your vehicle and its
ing an excessive load on the three- three- way catalytic converter sys-
The three- way catalytic converter is an way catalytic converter. tem best.
emission control device installed in the
Do not allow the engine to run at
To ensure that the three- way cata-
exhaust system. idle speed for more than 20 min- lytic converter and the entire emis-
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the utes. sion control system operate proper-
exhaust gas.
Avoid racing the engine. ly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the

Do not push- start or pull- start your
CAUTION Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
vehicle. scheduled maintenance information,

Keep people and combustible mate-
Do not turn off the ignition while refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
rials away from the exhaust pipe the vehicle is moving. Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
while the engine is running. The ment”.
exhaust gas is very hot.

Do not idle or park your vehicle
over anything that might burn easi-
ly such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.

286

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Facts about engine oil

Engine exhaust cautions consumption
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
Keep the back door and back win-
Engine oil has the primary functions of
dow closed while driving. An open
lubricating and cooling the inside of the

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. or unsealed back door and back
window, may cause exhaust gases engine, and plays a major role in main-
It contains carbon monoxide, which
taining the engine in proper working order.
is a colorless and odorless gas. It to be drawn into the vehicle.
can cause unconsciousness or even
To allow proper operation of your ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
death. vehicle’s ventilation system, keep It is normal that an engine should con-

Make sure the exhaust system has the inlet grilles in front of the wind- sume some engine oil during normal
no holes or loose connections. The shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth- engine operation. The causes of oil
system should be checked from er obstructions. consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.
time to time. If you hit something,
If you smell exhaust fumes in the
or notice a change in the sound of vehicle, drive with the windows
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
the exhaust, have the system open and the back door and back rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
checked immediately. window closed. Have the cause im- is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-

Do not run the engine in a garage mediately located and corrected. ton moves downwards in the cylinder.
or enclosed area except for the High negative pressure generated when
time needed to drive the vehicle in the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
or out. The exhaust gases cannot of this oil into the combustion chamber.
escape, making this a particularly This oil as well as some part of the oil
dangerous situation. film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion

Do not remain for a long time in a
gases during the combustion process.
parked vehicle with the engine run-
ning. If it is unavoidable, however,
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems
do so only in an unconfined area of the intake valves. Some of this oil
and adjust the heating or cooling is sucked into the combustion chamber
system to force outside air into the together with the intake air and is
vehicle. burned along with the fuel. High tem-
perature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.
287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Iridium- tipped spark plugs

(2UZ- FE engine)
The amount of engine oil consumed de- IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
pends on the viscosity of the oil, the CHECK
quality of the oil and the conditions the One of the most important points in prop-
vehicle is driven under. er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-
More oil is consumed by high- speed driv- gine oil at the optimum level so that oil
ing and frequent acceleration and decel- function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
eration. is essential that the oil level be checked
A new engine consumes more oil, since regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls level be checked every time you refuel
have not become conditioned. the vehicle.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 NOTICE
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600
miles) Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble Your engine is fitted with iridium- tipped
When judging the amount of oil con-
due to insufficient oil. spark plugs.
sumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately. For detailed information on oil level check, NOTICE
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
As an example, if a vehicle is used for Use only iridium- tipped spark plugs
page 376 in Section 7- 2.
repeated short trips, and consumes a nor- and do not adjust gaps for your en-
mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not gine performance and smooth drive-
show any drop in the oil level at all, even ability.
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.
288

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Brake system
This brake system has 2 independent hy- Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly ANTI- LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail, may turn on the brake system warning (with “ABS” warning light)
the other will still work. However, the ped- light and buzzer. It is normal if the light The anti- lock brake system is designed
al will be harder to press, and your stop- turns off and the buzzer stops sounding to help prevent lock- up of the wheels
ping distance will increase. Also, the after a few seconds. during a sudden braking or braking on
brake system warning light may come on. You may hear a small sound in the engine slippery road surfaces. This assists in
compartment after the engine is started or providing directional stability and steer-
CAUTION the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. ing performance of the vehicle under
This is a pump pulsating sound of the these circumstances.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a brake system, and it is not a malfunction.
single brake system. Have your Effective way to press the ABS brake
brakes fixed immediately. pedal: When the anti- lock brake system
CAUTION
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Do not pump the brake pedal if the
In this situation, to let the anti- lock
The brake booster uses brake fluid pres- engine stalls. Each push on the
brake system work for you, just hold the
surized by the pump to power- assist the pedal uses up your brake fluid
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
brakes. If the brake booster fails during pressure reserve.
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
driving, the brake system warning light
Even if the power assist is com- will result in reduced braking performan-
comes on and buzzer sounds continuous- pletely lost, the brakes will still ce.
ly. In this case, the brakes may not work work. But you will have to push the
properly. If they do not work well, depress pedal hard, much harder than nor- The anti- lock brake system becomes op-
the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system mal. And your braking distance will erative after the vehicle has accelerated
warning light comes on, immediately stop increase. to a speed in excess of approximately 10
your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal- km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
er. vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
It is not a malfunction that the brake sys-
tem warning light may stay on for 60 sec-
onds after the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position.

289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov- CAUTION
Driving with tire chains installed.
er, a steel plate at a construction site,
Driving over the steps such as the
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day Do not overestimate the anti- lock joints on the road.
tends to activate the anti- lock brake sys- brake system: Although the anti- lock
brake system assists in providing ve-
Driving on roads where the road
tem.
hicle control, it is still important to surface is pitted or has other differ-
You may hear a click or motor sound in ences in surface height.
drive with all due care and maintain
the engine compartment for a few seconds
a moderate speed and safe distance Install all 4 tires of specified size at
when the engine is started or just after
from the vehicle in front of you, be- appropriate pressure: The anti- lock
the vehicle begins to move. This means
cause there are limits to the vehicle brake system detects vehicle speeds
that the anti- lock brake system is in the
stability and effectiveness of steering using the speed sensors for respec-
self- check mode, and does not indicate a
wheel operation even with the anti- tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use
malfunction.
lock brake system on. of tires other than specified may fail
When the anti- lock brake system is ac- to detect the accurate turning speed
If tire grip performance exceeds its
tivated, the following conditions may resulting in a longer stopping dis-
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
occur. They do not indicate a malfunc- tance.
during high speed driving in the rain,
tion of the system:
the anti- lock brake system does not

You may hear the anti- lock brake sys- provide vehicle control.
tem operating and feel the brake pedal
Anti- lock brake system is not de-
pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-
signed to shorten the stopping dis-
hicle body and steering wheel. You
tance: Always drive at a moderate
may also hear the motor sound in the
speed and maintain a safe distance
engine compartment even after the ve-
from the vehicle in front of you.
hicle is stopped.
Compared with vehicles without an

At the end of the anti- lock brake sys- anti- lock brake system, your vehicle
tem activation, the brake pedal may may require a longer stopping dis-
move a little forward. tance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow-
covered roads.

290

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“ABS” warning light When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

The light comes on when the ignition key the brake system warning light is off), the
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti- anti- lock brake system does not operate
lock brake system and the brake assist so that the wheels will lock up during a
system work properly, the light turns off sudden braking or braking on slippery
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either road surfaces.
of the systems malfunctions, the light “VSC TRAC” warning light may come on
comes on again. with the “ABS” warning light (brake assist
system warning light) when there is a mal-
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
function somewhere in the anti- lock brake
the brake system warning light is off), the
system (brake assist system).
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally. If either of the following conditions oc-
curs, this indicates a malfunction some-
Type A

Anti- lock brake system where in the components monitored by

Brake assist system the warning light system. Contact your

Traction control system Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
(two- wheel drive models) service the vehicle.

Active traction control system
The light does not come on when the
(four- wheel drive models) ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, or remains on.

“AUTO LSD” system
(two- wheel drive models)
The light comes on while you are dri-
ving.

Vehicle stability control system
A warning light turning on briefly during

Downhill assist control system operation does not indicate a problem.
(four- wheel drive models)

Hill- start assist control system

Type B

291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Brake pad wear limit

indicators
Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-
CAUTION ding- down.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warn- When you slam the brakes on, the
ing light, immediately stop your ve- brake assist system judges as an emer-
hicle at a safe place and contact your gency stop and provides more powerful
Toyota dealer. braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
In this case, not only the anti- lock
brake system will fail but also the When you slam the brakes on, more pow-
vehicle will become extremely unsta- erful braking will be applied. At this time,
ble during braking. you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-
Either of the following conditions may
function. The brake pad wear limit indicators on
occur, but do not indicate a malfunc-
tion: The brake assist system becomes opera- your disc brakes give a warning noise
tive after the vehicle has accelerated to when the brake pads are worn to where

The light may stay on for about 60 replacement is required.
a speed in excess of approximately 10
seconds after the ignition key is turned
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
vehicle decelerates to a speed below while driving, have the brake pads
turns off after a while.
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). checked and replaced by your Toyota

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-
For an explanation of this system’s warn-
may turn on the light. It is normal if it tor damage can result if the pads are not
ing light, see “Service reminder indicators
turns off after a few seconds. replaced when necessary.
and warning buzzers” on page 145 in Sec-
DRUM- IN- DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE tion 1- 6.
SYSTEM
Your vehicle has a drum- in- disc type
parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs bedding- down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
292

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Limited- slip differential Your Toyota’s identification—

(four- wheel drive models) —Vehicle identification number
Your Toyota is equipped with a limited- slip
center differential (transfer). If one wheel
begins to spin, the limited- slip center dif-
ferential (transfer) is designed to aid trac-
tion by automatically transmitting driving
force to the wheels on the other drive
axle. It transmits driving force to the front
wheels if a rear wheel spins, and to the
rear wheels if a front wheel spins.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by a jack.
The vehicle could be driven off the The vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
jack and could pose a danger or re- is the legal identifier for your vehicle. also on the Certification Label.
sult in serious injury. This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
NOTICE This is the primary identification number
Use only a spare tire of the same for your Toyota. It is used in registering
brand, size, construction and load ca- the ownership of your vehicle.
pacity as the original tires on your
Toyota because damage to the limit-
ed- slip differential could possibly oc-
cur with another tire type.

293

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Theft prevention labels

—Engine number (except for Canada)
The engine number is stamped on the Your new vehicle carries theft preven-
engine block as shown. tion labels which are approximately 56
mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-
ing the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroy-
ing the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to anoth-
er, will be impossible.

1GR- FE engine NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may vio-
late certain state or federal laws.

2UZ- FE engine

294

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Suspension and chassis

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis

with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling charac-
teristics resulting in loss of control.

295

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tire information—
—Tire symbols
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 298.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 297.
3. Uniform tire quality grading—
For details, see “Uniform tire quali-
ty grading” that follows.
4. The location of the tread wear
indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 384.
5. Tire ply composition and mate-
rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-
ber- coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias- ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias- ply tire.

296

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)
7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not tire conforms to applicable Federal
have a tube inside the tire and air Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 384.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pres- This illustration indicates typical DOT
sure to which a tire may be in- and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
flated. For details about recom-
mended cold tire inflation 1. “DOT” symbol
pressure, see “Tires” on page 406. 2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
10.Summer tire or all season 3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
tire—An all season tire has “M+S” mark
on the sidewall. The tire not 4. Tire size code
marked with “M+S” is a summer
tire. For details, see “Types of 5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
tires” on page 308. code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

297

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

This illustration indicates typical tire 1. Section width 1. Bead

size. 2. Tire height 2. Sidewall
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car, 3. Wheel diameter 3. Shoulder
T=Temporary use)
4. Tread
2. Section width (in millimeters)
5. Belt
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width) 6. Inner liner
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial, 7. Reinforcing rubber
D=Diagonal) 8. Carcass
5. Wheel diameter (in inches) 9. Rim lines
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) 10.Bead wires
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one 11. Chafer
letter)

298

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Uniform tire quality grading

This information has been prepared Treadwear—The treadwear grade is Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
in accordance with regulations issued a comparative rating based on the grades, from highest to lowest, are
by the National Highway Traffic Safe- wear rate of the tire when tested un- AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
ty Administration of the U.S. Depart- der controlled conditions on a speci- the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment of Transportation. It provides fied government test course. For ex- ment as measured under controlled
the purchasers and/or prospective ample, a tire graded 150 would wear conditions on specified government
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in- one and a half (1- 1/2) times as well test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
formation on uniform tire quality grad- on the government course as a tire A tire marked C may have poor trac-
ing. graded 100. The relative performance tion performance.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer of tires depends upon the actual Warning: The traction grade assigned
any questions you may have as you conditions of their use, however, and to this tire is based on braking
read this information. may depart significantly from the (straight ahead) traction tests and
norm due to variations in driving hab- does not include cornering (turning)
DOT quality grades—All passenger its, service practices and differences
vehicle tires must conform to Fed- traction.
in road characteristics and climate.
eral Safety Requirements in addi-
tion to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum sec-
tion width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A

299

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-

ture grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

300

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power
Accessory weight
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items
are available as factory- installed equipment (whether installed or not)
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3
Cold tire inflation pressure hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile
under that condition
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the
Curb weight maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional engine
(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
Intended outboard sidewall deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it
Maximum inflation pressure
is shown on the sidewall of the tire
the sum of—
(a) curb weight;
Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) accessory weight;
(c) vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) production options weight

301

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tire related term Meaning

68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second
Normal occupant weight
column of Table 1 that follows
distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
Occupant distribution
1 that follows
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing
over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,
Production options weight not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim
Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
Rim
are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation rim diameter and width
Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-
(Total load capacity) nated seating capacity
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

302

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tire related term Meaning

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
Vehicle normal load on the tire its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, Vehicle normal load, number of Occupant distribution in a normally
number of occupants occupants loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

303

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load Seating capacity: Towing capacity:
capacity, seating capacity, towing ca- Without third seats: For weight carrying hitch
pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3) 2268 kg (5000 lb.)
load limits shown below. Total load ca- With third seats:
pacity and seating capacity are also Also for weight distributing hitch
Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)
described on the tire and loading in- 1GR- FE engine
formation label. For location of the tire Seating capacity means the maxi- Two- wheel drive models
and loading information label, see mum number of occupants whose 3042 kg (6700 lb.)
“Checking tire inflation pressure” on estimated average weight is 68 kg Four- wheel drive models
page 381. (150 lb.) per person. Depending on 2906 kg (6400 lb.)
the weight of each person, the seat-
Total load capacity: ing capacity given may exceed the 2UZ- FE engine
With 5 occupants: total load capacity. Two- wheel drive models
431 kg (950 lb.) 3311 kg (7300 lb.)
With 7 occupants: NOTICE Four- wheel drive models
476 kg (1050 lb.) 3175 kg (7000 lb.)
Even if the number of occupants
Total load capacity means com- Towing capacity means the maxi-
are within the seating capacity,
bined weight of occupants, cargo mum gross trailer weight (trailer
do not exceed the total load ca-
and luggage. Tongue load is in- weight plus its cargo weight) that
pacity.
cluded when trailer towing. your vehicle is able to tow.

304

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions
Cargo capacity When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
Do not store more than 91 kg
Cargo capacity may increase or de- (200 lb.) of cargo and luggage
crease depending on the size (weight)
Put cargo and luggage in the lug- in the luggage compartment. If
and the number of occupants. For de- gage compartment when at all the third seats are occupied,
tails, see “Capacity and distribution” possible. Be sure all items are se- do not store cargo and luggage
that follows. cured in place. in the luggage compartment.

Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-
Do not place anything on the
CAUTION anced. Locating the weight as far flattened seat or it may slide
forward as possible helps maintain forward during braking.
Do not apply the load more than balance.
each load limit. That may cause
Never allow anyone to ride in
not only damage to the tires, but
For better fuel economy, do not the luggage compartment. It is
also deterioration to the steering carry unneeded weight. not designed for passengers.
ability and braking ability, which They should ride in their seats
may cause an accident. CAUTION with their seat belts properly
fastened. Otherwise, they are

To prevent cargo and luggage much more likely to suffer seri-
from sliding forward during ous bodily injury, in the event
braking, do not stack anything of sudden braking or a colli-
in the luggage compartment sion.
higher than the seatbacks.
Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as pos-
sible.

305

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the to- 4. The resulting figure equals the

Do not place anything on the tal weight of the occupants. available amount of cargo and lug-
luggage cover. Such items may gage load capacity. For example,
be thrown about and possibly (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-
ity) – (Total weight of occupants) if the “XXX” amount equals 1400
injure people in the vehicle lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
during sudden braking or an STEPS FOR DETERMINING passengers in your vehicle, the
accident. Secure all items in a CORRECT LOAD LIMIT amount of available cargo and lug-
safe place. 1. Locate the statement “The com- gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

Do not drive with objects left bined weight of occupants and (1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).
on top of the instrument panel. cargo should never exceed XXX 5. Determine the combined weight of
They may interfere with the pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. luggage and cargo being loaded
driver’s field of view. Or they 2. Determine the combined weight of on the vehicle. That weight may
may move during sharp vehicle the driver and passengers that will not safely exceed the available
acceleration or turning, and im- be riding in your vehicle. cargo and luggage load capacity
pair the driver’s control of the calculated in Step 4.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
vehicle. In an accident they
the driver and passengers from 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
may injure the vehicle occu-
pants. XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available car-
go and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see
page 316.

306

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

From this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of 176 CAUTION
kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-
go and luggage load will be reduced Even if the total load of occu-
as follows: pant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capac-
With 5 occupants: ity, do not apply the load uneven-
Cargo 265 kg – 176 kg = 89 kg. ly. That may cause not only dam-
capacity (584 lb. – 388 lb. = 196 lb.) age to the tire but also deteriora-
With 7 occupants: tion to the steering ability due to
Total load 310 kg – 176 kg = 134 kg. unbalance of the vehicle, causing
capacity (683 lb. – 388 lb. = 295 lb.) an accident.
As shown in the above example, if the
EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE number of occupants increases, the
In case that 2 people with the com- cargo and luggage load equaling the
bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
riding in your vehicle with the total
load capacity of 431 kg (950 lb.), the words, if the increase in the number
available amount of cargo and lug- of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
gage load capacity will be as follows:
weight of occupants plus cargo and
With 5 occupants: luggage load), you have to reduce the
431 kg – 166 kg = 265 kg. cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
(950 lb. – 366 lb. = 584 lb.)
For details about total load capacity,
With 7 occupants: see “Vehicle load limits” on page 304.
476 kg – 166 kg = 310 kg.
(1050 lb. – 366 lb. = 684 lb.)

307

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Types of tires
Weight of Determine what kind of tires your All season tires, however, do not have
Cargo the removed vehicle is originally equipped with. adequate traction performance
capacity third seat 1. Summer tires compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
Summer tires are high- speed capabil- short in acceleration and handling
ity tires best suited to highway driving performance compared with summer
under dry conditions. tires in highway driving.
Since summer tires do not have the The details about how to distinguish
same traction performance as snow summer tires from all season tires are
tires, summer tires are inadequate for described on page 296.
driving on snow- covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow- covered or icy CAUTION
roads, we recommend using snow
SEATING CONFIGURATION tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
Do not mix summer and all sea-
VARIATION to replace all four tires. son tires on your vehicle as
In case of removing the rear seats, 2. All season tires this can cause dangerous han-
it is possible to load as much cargo All season tires are designed to pro- dling characteristics, resulting
as the weight of the removed seats. vide better traction in snow and to be in loss of control.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac- adequate for driving in most winter
Do not use tire other than the
ity) - (Total weight of occupants) + conditions, as well as for use all year manufacturer’s designated
(Weight of the removed rear seats) round. tires, and never mix tires or
Rear seats weights: wheels of the sizes different
Each seat 11 kg (24 lb.) from the originals.

308

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 3
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Off- road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

309

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

How to start the engine—

Before starting the engine —Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking
1. Check the area around the vehicle be- Once you turn the ignition key to “START” 1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
fore entering it. position and release it, the cranking hold 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, function continues to crank the engine in sories.
seat cushion angle, head restraint “ON” position until it starts.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
height and steering wheel angle. The function stops cranking the engine need to restart the engine while the
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view after about 25 seconds maximum if the vehicle is moving, put the selector le-
mirrors. engine has not started yet. When you ver in “N”. A starter safety device will
crank the engine again, wait a few sec- prevent the starter from operating if the
4. Lock all doors. onds and restart it. selector lever is in any drive position.
5. Fasten seat belts. If you hold the key in “START” position, 4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the function will keep cranking for about the floor until driving off.
30 seconds maximum.

310

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tips for driving in various

(b) Starting the engine conditions
Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
NOTICE
low the instructions in “(a) Before crank- This will allow you much better control.
ing”.
Do not race a cold engine.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-
Normal starting procedure
If the engine becomes difficult to sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
The multiport fuel injection system/sequen- start or stalls frequently, have the onto high, sharp- edged objects and
tial multiport fuel injection system in your engine checked immediately. other road hazards. Failure to do so
engine automatically controls the proper can lead to severe tire damage such
air- fuel mixture for starting. You can start as a tire burst.
a cold or hot engine as follows: Drive slowly when passing over bumps
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-
turn the ignition key to “START” position, wise, the impact could cause severe
then release it. damage to the tires and/or wheels.
Engine should be warmed up by driving,
When parking on a hill, turn the front
not in idle. For warming up, drive with wheels until they touch the curb so
smoothly turning engine until engine cool- that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
ant temperature is within normal range. parking brake, and place the transmis-
sion in “P”. If necessary, block the
If the engine stalls... wheels.
Simply restart it, using the correct proce-
Washing your vehicle or driving through
dure given in normal starting. deep water may get the brakes wet. To
If the engine will not start... see whether they are wet, check that
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page there is no traffic near you, and then
330 in Section 4. press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the park-
ing brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

311

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When you drive on a
Do not drive in excess of the speed
Vehicles with rear height control air
bumpy road, it is recommended that limit. Even if the legal speed limit suspension: If you drive through
the vehicle height should be set in the permits it, do not drive over 140 deep water over about 700 mm (28
“N” (normal) or “H” (high) mode. km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle in.) in depth, put the vehicle height
has high- speed capability tires. in the “H” (high) mode with the
CAUTION Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may height select switch and then turn
result in tire failure, loss of control off the rear height control air sus-

Before driving off, make sure that and possible injury. Be sure to con- pension by pushing the “HEIGHT
the parking brake is fully released sult a tire dealer to determine CONTROL OFF” switch. Drive your
and the parking brake reminder whether the tires on your vehicle vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or low-
light is off. are high- speed capability tires or er speed.
not before driving at such speeds.

Do not leave your vehicle unat-
tended while the engine is running.
Do not continue normal driving
when the brakes are wet. If they are

Do not rest your foot on the brake wet, your vehicle will require a
pedal while driving. It can cause longer stopping distance, and it
dangerous overheating, needless may pull to one side when the
wear, and poor fuel economy. brakes are applied. Also, the park-

To drive down a long or steep hill, ing brake will not hold the vehicle
reduce your speed and downshift. securely.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.

Be careful when accelerating, up-
shifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-
tion or engine braking, could cause
the vehicle to skid or spin.

312

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Off- road driving precautions

When driving your vehicle off- road, please
Recreational Vehicle Clubs

After driving through tall grass,
observe the following precautions to en-
U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
sure your driving enjoyment and to help Land Management
prevent the closure of areas to off- road that there is no grass, bush, paper,
vehicles. rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
CAUTION trapped on the underbody. Clear off
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
any such matter from the under-
off- road vehicles are permitted to trav- Always observe the following precau- body. If the vehicle is used with
el. tions to minimize the risk of serious these materials trapped or adhering
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s personal injury or damage to your ve- to the underbody, a breakdown or
permission before entering private prop- hicle: fire could occur.
erty.
Drive carefully when off the road.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
c. Do not enter areas that are closed. Do not take unnecessary risks by son is significantly more likely to
Honor gates, barriers and signs that re- driving in dangerous places. die than a person wearing a seat
strict travel.
Do not grip the steering wheel belt. Therefore, the driver and all
d. Stay on established roads. When condi- spokes when driving off- road. A passengers should fasten their seat
tions are wet, driving techniques should bad bump could jerk the wheel and belts whenever the vehicle is mov-
be changed or travel delayed to pre- injure your hands. Keep both hands ing.
vent damage to roads. and especially your thumbs on the
When driving off- road or in rugged
outside of the rim. terrain, do not drive at excessive
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
Always check your brakes for effec- speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
tiveness immediately after driving in strike objects, etc. This may cause
To obtain additional information pertaining
sand, mud, water or snow. loss of control or vehicle rollover
to driving your vehicle off- road, consult causing death or serious injury. You
the following organizations. are also risking expensive damage

State and Local Parks and Recreation to your vehicle’s suspension and
Departments chassis.

State Motor Vehicle Bureau

313

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Winter driving tips

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-
NOTICE
Always perform a maintenance in- tected against freezing.
spection after each day of off- road

If driving through water, such as Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
driving that has taken you through
when crossing shallow streams, rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. or similar high quality ethylene glycol
first check the depth of the water based non- silicate, non- amine, non- nitrite,
For scheduled maintenance informa-
and the bottom of the river bed for and non- borate coolant with long- life hy-
tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid tenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual brid organic acid technology. (Coolant with
deep water. long- life hybrid organic acid technology is
Supplement”.

Take all necessary safety measures a combination of low phosphates and or-
to ensure that water damage to the ganic acids.)
engine or other components does See “Checking the engine coolant level”
not occur. on page 378 in Section 7- 2 for details of
Water entering the engine air intake coolant type selection.
will cause severe engine damage. For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Water can wash the grease from Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
wheel bearings, causing rusting and 50% deionized water. This coolant pro-
premature failure, and may also en- vides protection down to about -35C
ter the differentials, transmission (- 31F).
and transfer case, reducing the gear For the Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
oil’s lubricating qualities. Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

Sand and mud that has accumulated 45% deionized water. This coolant pro-
in brake drums and around brake vides protection down to about -42C
discs may affect braking efficiency (- 44F).
and may damage brake system com-
NOTICE
ponents.
Do not use plain water alone.

314

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Dinghy towing
Check the condition of the battery and
NOTICE
cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of Do not use engine antifreeze or any
any battery, so it must be in top shape to other substitute because it may dam-
provide enough power for winter starting. age your vehicle’s paint.
Section 7- 3 tells you how to visually in-
spect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and Do not use your parking brake when
most service stations will be pleased to there is a possibility it could freeze.
check the level of charge.
When parking, put the transmission into
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is “P” and block the front wheels. Do not
suitable for the cold weather. use the parking brake, or snow or water
See page 376 in Section 7- 2 for recom- accumulated in and around the parking
mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum- brake mechanism may freeze, making it
mer oil in your vehicle during winter hard to release. Your vehicle is not designed to be
months may cause harder starting. If you Keep ice and snow from accumulating dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
are not sure about which oil to use, call under the fenders. ground) behind a motorhome.
your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
to help. NOTICE
can make steering difficult. During bad
Keep the door locks from freezing. winter driving, stop and check under the Do not tow your vehicle with four
Squirt lock de- icer or glycerine into the fenders occasionally. wheels on the ground. This may
locks to keep them from freezing. Depending on where you are driving, cause serious damage to your vehicle.
Use a washer fluid containing an anti- we recommend you carry some emer-
freeze solution. gency equipment.
This product is available at your Toyota Some of the things you might put in the
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
the manufacturer’s directions for how bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
much to mix with water. jumper cables, etc.

315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a WEIGHT LIMITS
passenger- and- load- carrying vehicle. Tow- Before towing, make sure the total trail-
ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on er weight, gross combination weight,
handling, performance, braking, durability gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight
and driving economy (fuel consumption, and trailer tongue load are all within
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend the limits.
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your safe- The total trailer weight and tongue load
ty and the safety of others, you must not can be measured with platform scales
overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your found at a highway weighing station, build-
local Toyota dealer for further details be- ing supply company, trucking company,
fore towing. junk yard, etc.

CAUTION For weight carrying hitch (type A)

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When disconnecting a
trailer, put the vehicle height in the
“LO” (low) mode and push the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to
turn off the rear height control air
suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may be changed in the auto-
matic leveling function, resulting in
accident. For details see “Rear height
control air suspension” on page 182
in Section 1- 7.

For weight carrying hitch (type B)

316

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-

ing over 2268 kg (5000 lb.), Toyota

The maximum gross trailer weight recommends to use a weight dis-
(trailer weight plus cargo weight) tributing hitch.
must never exceed the following for If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-
vehicle with equipped. For details, ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is
contact your Toyota dealer. necessary to use a sway control

According to the hitch receiver device with sufficient capacity. The
type, the maximum gross trailer combination of the gross trailer
weight and hitch that can be used weight added to the total weight of
differs. Refer to the above illustra- the vehicle, occupants and vehicle
tions to confirm the hitch receiver cargo must never exceed a total of
Also for weight distributing hitch type for your vehicle. the following.
For weight carrying hitch For weight carrying hitch
2268 kg (5000 lb.) 1GR- FE engine
Also for weight distributing hitch 4354 kg (9600 lb.)
2UZ- FE engine
1GR- FE engine 4422 kg (9750 lb.)
Two- wheel drive models
3042 kg (6700 lb.) Also for weight distributing hitch
Four- wheel drive models 1GR- FE engine
2906 kg (6400 lb.) 5039 kg (11100 lb.)
2UZ- FE engine
2UZ- FE engine 5443 kg (12000 lb.)
Two- wheel drive models
3311 kg (7300 lb.) Exceeding the maximum weight of
Four- wheel drive models the trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-
3175 kg (7000 lb.) hicle and trailer combination, can
cause an accident resulting in seri-
ous personal injuries.

317

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

The gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Total trailer weight Tongue load
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehi-
cle weight is the sum of weights of
the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle. Tongue load

100 = 10%

The load on either the front or rear Total trailer weight
axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the front and

Trailer hitch assemblies have differ- rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings
The trailer cargo load should be
ent weight capacities established by (GAWR) listed on the Certification distributed so that the tongue load
the hitch manufacturer. Even though Label. is 10% of the total trailer weight,
the vehicle may be physically capa- not exceeding the maximum load of
ble of towing a higher weight, the the following.
operator must determine the maxi- For weight carrying hitch
mum weight rating of the particular 227 kg (500 lb.)
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating speci-
fied for the trailer- hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in seri-
ous personal injuries.

318

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

HITCHES
Also for weight distributing hitch CAUTION

If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you
1GR- FE engine should consult with your Toyota dealer.
Two- wheel drive models Do not tow the vehicle using the
304 kg (670 lb.)
Use only a hitch recommended by the hooked portion of the weight carrying
hitch manufacturer and the one which hitch. The hooked portion may break
Four- wheel drive models
290 kg (640 lb.) conforms to the total trailer weight re- and cause serious injury or damage
quirement. to the vehicle.
2UZ- FE engine
Two- wheel drive models

According to the hitch receiver type,
331 kg (730 lb.) the maximum gross trailer weight and
hitch that can be used differs. Refer to NOTICE
Four- wheel drive models
the above illustrations to confirm the
Do not install weight distributing
317 kg (700 lb.)
hitch receiver type for your vehicle. hitch to weight carrying hitch re-
Never load the trailer with more
weight in the back than in the

If you wish to install an aftermarket ceiver because it will be damaged
hitch, the hitch must be bolted securely your vehicle.
front. About 60% of the trailer load
to the vehicle frame and installed ac-
Do not use axle- mounted hitches as
should be in the front half of the
cording to the hitch manufactures’ in- they can cause damage to the axle
trailer and the remaining 40% in the
rear. structions. housing, wheel bearings, wheels or

The hitch ball and king pin should have tires. Also, never install a hitch
a light coat of grease. which may interfere with the normal

Toyota recommends the ball mount as- function of an Energy Absorbing
sembly be removed when not towing to Bumper, if so equipped.
prevent injury and to prevent damage
in the event of a rear end collision.
After removing the ball mount assem-
bly, install the grommet to the hitch to
prevent entry of dirt and mud.

319

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TRAILER BALL
Follow these easy steps to properly deter-
mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-
plication:
1. Determine the correct trailer ball size
for the trailer coupler. Most couplers
are stamped with the required trailer
ball size. The sizes you will most likely
find stamped on the coupler are:
Trailer class Typical trailer ball size
IV 2 5/16 in.
II and III 2 in.
1 Trailer ball load rating
2 Ball diameter I 1 7/8 in.
3 Shank length
4 Shank diameter 2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to
match or exceed the gross trailer
weight rating of the trailer. The trailer
ball load rating should be printed on
the top of the ball.
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the
threaded ball shank must protrude be-
yond the bottom of the lock washer
and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer
ball shank must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter size.

NOTICE
Only use a ball mount attachment 1 Coupler
2 Trailer ball
specified for the Toyota 4runner.
3 Ball mount attachment
320

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO

TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT CAUTION
No matter which class of tow hitch ap-

If the total trailer weight exceeds
plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer
453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
ball setup on must be the proper height
required.
for the coupler on the trailer.
BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-
draulic system as it would lower its

Toyota recommends trailers with braking effectiveness.
brakes that conform to any applica-
ble federal and state/provincial regu-

Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to
lations.
both the trailer and the vehicle. If

A safety chain must always be used damage occurs to the coupling unit
between the towing vehicle and the or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the trailer wandering over into another SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING
chain for turns. The chain should lane. BRAKE CONTROLLER
cross under the trailer tongue to Your vehicle is equipped with a service
prevent the tongue from dropping to connector for the towing brake controller
the ground in case it becomes dam- as shown. Link the connector to the tow-
aged or separated. For correct safety ing brake controller via the sub wire har-
chain procedures, follow the hitch or ness stored in the glove box. The detailed
trailer manufacturer’s recommenda- explanation of the sub wire harness circuit
tions. is packed together with the sub wire har-
ness.
Be sure to position the towing brake con-
troller where it does not prevent the driver
from operating the pedal.
Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-
ness be stored in the glove box when it
is not in use.

321

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TIRES
Your vehicle is equipped with a wire

Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are harness stored in the rear end under
properly inflated. See page 381 in Sec- body. Some models are fitted with a
tion 7- 2 and page 406 in Section 8 for socket for trailer lights under the rear
instructions. bumper. Use either of them to connect
and operate the trailer lights. However,

The trailer tires should be inflated to the trailer lights must comply with fed-
the pressure recommended by the trail- eral, state/provincial and local regula-
er manufacturer in respect to the total tions. See your local recreational ve-
trailer weight. hicle dealer or rental agency for the
correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation
of the turn signals and stop lights each
time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER damage your vehicle’s electrical system
LIGHTS and cause a malfunction of your lights.
The towing connector can be also con-
nected to the trailer brake and trailer
sub battery.
BREAK- IN SCHEDULE

Toyota recommends that you do not
tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train com-
ponent (engine, transmission, differen-
tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.

322

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

MAINTENANCE DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (models 7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO”

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will with rear height control air suspension) (low) mode where the hitch does not
require more frequent maintenance due Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and touch anything in the “N” (normal)
to the additional load. For this informa- perform the following: mode.
tion, please refer to the scheduled 1. Put the rear height control air suspen- 8. Put the rear height control air suspen-
maintenance information in the “Sched- sion in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make sion in the “N” (normal) mode.
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s sure the vehicle height is in the “LO” PRE- TOWING SAFETY CHECK
Manual Supplement”. (low) mode by pushing the height se-
Check that your vehicle remains level

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing lect switch on the “” side.) when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
ball and bracket after approximately 2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving. “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to an abnormal nose- up or nose- down
CONNECTING A TRAILER (models with turn off the rear height control air sus- condition, and check for improper
rear height control air suspension) pension. tongue load, overload, worn suspension
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and 3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on or other possible causes.
perform the following: the ground and raise the hitch by 100
Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
1. Put the rear height control air suspen- mm (4 in.). loaded so that it cannot shift.
sion in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn the 4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the
Check that your rear view mirrors con-
ignition switch off or push the “HEIGHT “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to form to any applicable federal, state/
CONTROL OFF” switch to turn off the turn on the rear height control air sus- provincial or local regulations. If not,
rear height control air suspension. pension. install the rear view mirrors required
2. Connect a trailer. 5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the for towing purpose.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the rear vehicle height is lowered by the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to automatic leveling function.
turn on the rear height control air sus- 6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If
pension. Select the “N” (normal) mode not, raise the hitch higher and repeat
with the height select switch. steps 2 through 5.

323

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TRAILER TOWING TIPS
Because stopping distance may be in-
Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will creased, vehicle- to- vehicle distance versely affect handling of your vehicle
handle differently than when not tow- should be increased when towing a and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
ing. The three main causes of vehicle- trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of to the rear from time to time to pre-
trailer accidents are driver error, exces- speed, allow at least one vehicle and pare yourself for being passed by large
sive speed and improper trailer loading. trailer length between you and the ve- trucks or buses, which may cause your
Keep these in mind when towing: hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing happens, firmly grip the steering wheel

Before starting out, check operation of and loss of control. This is especially and reduce speed immediately but
the lights and all vehicle- trailer connec- true on wet or slippery surfaces. gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
tions. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and con-
Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera- straight ahead. If you make no extreme
tion. correction with the steering or brakes,
nections. Before actually towing a trail- the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
er, practice turning, stopping and back-
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
ing with a trailer in an area away from The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
Be careful when passing other ve-
traffic until you learn the feel. tight turn. Slow down before making a hicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do

Backing with a trailer is difficult and turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
not forget the length of your trailer and
requires practice. Grip the bottom of braking.
be sure you have plenty of room befo-
the steering wheel and move your hand
Remember that when making a turn, re changing lanes.
to the left to move the trailer to the the trailer wheels will be closer than
left. Move your hand to the right to the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
In order to maintain engine braking effi-
move the trailer to the right. (This pro- turn. Therefore, compensate for this by ciency, do not put the transmission in
cedure is generally opposite to that making a larger than normal turning “D”.
when backing without a trailer.) Also, radius with your vehicle.
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an acci-
dent.

324

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Because of the added load of the trail- When restarting out after parking on a
er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat slope:
Slow down and downshift before
on hot days (at temperatures over descending steep or long downhill
1. With the transmission in “P” position,
30C [85F]) when going up a long or grades. Do not make sudden down-
start the engine. Be sure to keep the shifts.
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine brake pedal depressed.
coolant temperature gauge indicates
Avoid holding the brake pedal down
overheating, immediately turn off the air 2. Shift into gear. too long or too frequently. This
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road 3. Release the parking brake and brake could cause the brakes to overheat
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If pedal and slowly pull or back away and result in reduced braking effi-
your vehicle overheats” on page 334 in from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply ciency.
Section 4. your brakes.

Always place wheel blocks under both 4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. CAUTION
Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-
ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it
Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or
cannot be avoided, do so only after the posted towing speed limit,
performing the following: whichever is lower. Because insta-
1. Apply the brakes and hold. bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle-
trailer combination usually in-
2. Have someone place wheel blocks un- creases as the speed increases, ex-
der both the vehicle and trailer wheels. ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, cause loss of control.
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

325

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer
Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
Accelerate slowly and smoothly.
Maintain a moderate speed on high-
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high ways. The faster you drive, the greater
longer, too. Here are some specific tips gear as quickly as possible. the fuel consumption. By reducing your
on how to save money on both fuel and
Avoid long engine idling. If you have speed, you will cut down on fuel con-
repairs: a long wait and you are not in traffic, sumption.

Keep your tires inflated at the cor- it is better to turn off the engine and
Keep the front wheels in proper
rect pressure. Underinflation causes start again later. alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
Avoid engine lugging or over- rev- slow down on rough roads. Improper
381 in Section 7- 2 for instructions. ving. Use a gear position suitable for alignment not only causes faster tire

Do not carry unneeded weight in the road on which you are travelling. wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
Avoid continuous speeding up and
heavier load on the engine, causing slowing down. Stop- and- go driving
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
greater fuel consumption. wastes fuel. from mud, etc. This not only lessens

Avoid lengthy warm- up idling. Once
Avoid unnecessary stopping and
weight but also helps prevent corro-
the engine is running smoothly, begin sion.
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
driving—but gently. Remember, howev- to time the traffic signals so you only
Keep your vehicle tuned- up and in
er, that on cold winter days this may need to stop as little as possible or top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-
take a little longer. take advantage of through streets to er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil

Put the selector lever into the “D” avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis- and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
when engine braking is not required. tance from other vehicles to avoid sud- all lower engine performance and con-
den braking. This will also reduce wear tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
Driving with the selector lever in “4” life of all parts and lower operating
will reduce the fuel economy. (For de- on your brakes.
costs, keep all maintenance work on
tails, see “Automatic transmission” on
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams schedule, and if you often drive under
page 157 in Section 1- 7.) whenever possible. severe conditions, see that your vehicle

Do not rest your foot on the brake receives more frequent maintenance.
pedal. This causes premature wear, (For scheduled maintenance informa-
overheating and poor fuel economy. tion, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-
al Supplement”.)

326

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function with-
out the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is run-
ning.

327

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

328

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 350
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

329

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine
Before making these checks, make sure If the engine will not start, your engine
NOTICE
you have followed the correct starting pro- may be flooded because of repeated
cedure given in “How to start the engine” Do not pull- or push- start the ve- cranking.
on page 310 in Section 3 and that you hicle. It may damage the vehicle or If this happens, turn the ignition key to
have sufficient fuel. Also, check whether cause a collision when the engine “START” with the accelerator pedal fully
the other keys will start the engine. If starts. Also the three- way catalytic depressed, and hold the key at this posi-
they work, your key may be broken. Have converter may overheat and become a tion for about 30 seconds. Then the
the key checked at your Toyota dealer. If fire hazard. cranking hold function stops cranking au-
none of your keys work, there may be a tomatically, and you can try starting the
malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call engine with your foot off the accelerator
If the engine turns over at its normal
your Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page pedal.
speed but will not start—
12 in Section 1- 2.)
1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or If the engine does not start, wait a few
If the engine is not turning over or is minutes and try again.
“LOCK” and try starting the engine
turning over too slowly—
again. If the engine still will not start, it needs
1. Check that the battery terminals are adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
2. If the engine will not start, the engine
tight and clean. or qualified repair shop for assistance.
may be flooded because of repeated
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
on the interior light. engine” on page 330 for further instruc-
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out tions.
when the starter is cranked, the battery 3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
is discharged. You may try jump start- adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page dealer or qualified repair shop.
331 for further instructions.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.

330

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

(c) Jump starting

To avoid serious personal injury and JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
damage to your vehicle which might re-
The gas normally produced by a
1. If the booster battery is installed in
sult from battery explosion, acid burns, battery will explode if a flame or
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
electrical burns, or damaged electronic spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do are not touching. Turn off all unneces-
components, these instructions must be sary lights and accessories.
followed precisely. not smoke or light a match while
jump starting. When boosting, use the battery of
If you are unsure about how to follow this matching or higher quality. Any other
procedure, we strongly recommend that battery may be difficult to jump start
you seek the help of a competent me- NOTICE with.
chanic or towing service.
The battery used for boosting must If jump starting is difficult, charge the
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you battery for several minutes.
CAUTION
are sure that the booster battery is 2. If required, remove all the vent plugs

Batteries contain sulfuric acid correct. from the booster and discharged batter-
which is poisonous and corrosive. ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents
Wear protective safety glasses when on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
jump starting, and avoid spilling explosion hazard, personal injuries and
acid on your skin, clothing, or ve- burns.)
hicle. 3. If the engine in the vehicle with the

If you should accidentally get acid booster battery is not running, start it
on yourself or in your eyes, remove and let it run for a few minutes. During
any contaminated clothing and flush jump starting run the engine at about
the affected area with water imme- 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
diately. Then get immediate medical lightly depressed.
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while en route to the medical office.

331

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Jumper cable
Discharged battery

Booster
battery

Positive
terminal Negative
Discharged battery
(“+” mark) terminal
Jumper cable Positive terminal (“- ” mark)
(“+” mark) Booster battery
Connecting point for 1GR- FE engine
4. Make the cable connections in the or- c. Connect the clamp of the negative
der a, b, c, d. (black) jumper cable to the negative (- )
a. Connect the clamp of the positive terminal on the booster battery.
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+) d. Connect the clamp at the other end
terminal on the discharged battery. of the negative (black) jumper cable to
b. Connect the clamp at the other end a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
of the positive (red) jumper cable to point of the vehicle with the discharged
the positive (+) terminal on the booster battery.
battery. The recommended connecting points
are shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 2UZ- FE engine

332

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If your engine stalls while

driving
Do not connect the cable to or near 9. If removed, replace all the battery vent If your engine stalls while driving...
any part that moves when the engine plugs. 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
is cranked. If the cause of your battery discharging is a straight line. Move cautiously off the
not apparent (for example, lights left on), road to a safe place.
CAUTION you should have it checked at your Toyota 2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
dealer.
When making the connections, to 3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or
If the first start attempt is not success- “LOCK”, and try starting the engine
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
ful... again.
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch any- Check that the clamp on the jumper If the engine will not start, see “If your
thing except the correct battery termi- cables are tight. Recharge the discharged vehicle will not start” on page 330 in this
nals or the ground. battery with the jumper cables connected Section.
for several minutes and restart your en-
gine in the normal way.
5. Charge the discharged battery with the CAUTION
jumper cables connected for approxi- If the another attempt is not successful,
mately 5 minutes. At this time, run the the battery may be depleted. Have it ch- If the engine is not running, the pow-
engine in the vehicle with the booster ecked at your Toyota dealer. er assist for the brakes and steering
battery at about 2000 rpm with the ac- will not work so steering and braking
celerator pedal lightly depressed. will be much harder than usual.
6. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.

333

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If you cannot increase engine

speed If your vehicle overheats
If engine speed does not increase when If your engine coolant temperature 3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there gauge indicates overheating, if you ex- radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
may be a problem somewhere in the elec- perience a loss of power, or if you hear However, note that water draining from
tronic throttle control system. a loud knocking or pinging noise, the the air conditioning is normal if it has
At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- engine has probably overheated. You been used.
er, if you depress the accelerator pedal should follow this procedure...
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your 1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve- CAUTION
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle hicle and turn on your emergency
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as flashers. Put the transmission in “P” When the engine is running, keep
possible. and apply the parking brake. Turn off hands and clothing away from the
the air conditioning if it is being used. moving fan and engine drive belts.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during 2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
low speed driving, the system may not be radiator or reservoir, stop the engine. 4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the
recovered until the engine is stopped and Wait until the steam subsides before coolant is leaking, stop the engine im-
the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or opening the hood. If there is no coolant mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-
“LOCK” position. boiling over or steam, leave the engine sistance.
running. 5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
CAUTION there are no obvious leaks, you may
CAUTION help the engine cool down more quickly
Be especially careful to prevent erro- by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
neous pedal operation. To help avoid personal injury, keep few minutes with the accelerator pedal
the hood closed until there is no lightly depressed.
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is 6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
a sign of very high pressure. add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” on page 379 in Section 7- 2.

334

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If you have a flat tire—

1. Reduce your speed gradually,
CAUTION keeping a straight line. Move cau- CAUTION
tiously off the road to a safe place
Do not attempt to remove the radiator When jacking, be sure to observe
cap when the engine and radiator are
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of the following to reduce the possi-
hot. Serious injury could result from bility of personal injury:
scalding hot fluid and steam blown a highway. Park on a level spot
out under pressure. with firm ground.
Follow jacking instructions.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
Do not put any part of your
7. After the engine coolant temperature emergency flashers. body under the vehicle sup-
has cooled to normal, again check the 3. Firmly set the parking brake and ported by the jack. Otherwise,
coolant level in the reservoir. If neces- personal injury may occur.
put the transmission in “P”.
sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-
ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the 4. Have everyone get out of the ve-
Do not start or run the engine
system. You should have it checked as hicle on the side away from traffic. while your vehicle is supported
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer. by the jack.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake and put the transmission
in “P”. Block the wheel diago-
nally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.

335

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Required tools and spare

tire

Make sure to set the jack prop- NOTICE

erly in the jack point. Raising

Do not continue driving with
the vehicle with jack improper- a deflated tire. Driving even a
ly positioned will damage the short distance can damage a
vehicle or may allow the ve-
tire and wheel beyond repair.
hicle to fall off the jack and
cause personal injury.
Vehicles with rear height con-
trol air suspension: When

Never get under the vehicle
jacking up or installing the
when the vehicle is supported tire chains, be sure to turn
by the jack alone. off the rear height control

Use the jack only for lifting and stop the engine. Other-
your vehicle during wheel wise, the vehicle height may
changing. change in the automatic lev- 1. Get the required tools and
spare tire.

Do not raise the vehicle with eling function, resulting in
someone in the vehicle. accident. 1. Tool bag
2. Jack

When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top To prepare yourself for an emergency,
of or underneath the jack. you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools

Raise the vehicle only high and their storage locations.
enough to remove and change
the tire. When storing the tool bag, make sure
it is securely held by the tightening
strap.

336

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Turn the jack joint by hand. To remove the spare tire under the When connecting the jack handle ex-
To remove: Turn the joint in direction luggage compartment: tensions, use the jack handle to tight-
1 until the jack is free. 1. Put a jack handle and jack handle en the square head bolt. Make sure
To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 extensions together as shown in that the bolt fits into the depression
until the jack is firmly secured to pre- the illustration. on the joint.
vent it flying forward during a collision 1. Jack handle extensions When connecting the jack handle ex-
or sudden braking. 2. Jack handle tension with the jack handle, tighten
the round head bolt by hand.
NOTICE
Tighten the square head bolt
securely. Otherwise, the exten-
sion may come off and it may
damage the paint or vehicle
body.

337

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Blocking the wheel —Removing wheel ornament

2. Insert the end of the jack handle 2. Block the wheel diagonally op- 3. Remove the wheel ornament.
extension into the lowering screw posite the flat tire to keep the Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
and turn it counterclockwise with vehicle from rolling when it is beveled end of the wheel nut wrench
the handle. jacked up. as shown.
3. After the tire is lowered completely When blocking the wheel, place a
to the ground, remove the holding wheel block in front of one of the front CAUTION
bracket. wheels or behind one of the rear
When storing the spare tire, put it in wheels. Do not try to pull off the orna-
place with the outer side of the wheel ment by hand. Take due care in
facing up. Then secure the tire, taking handling the ornament to avoid
care that the tire goes straight up unexpected personal injury.
without catching on any other part, to
prevent it from flying forward during
a collision or sudden braking.

338

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Loosening wheel nuts —Positioning the jack

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose
and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious ac-
cident.

Front Rear

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts. 5. Position the jack at the correct
Always loosen the wheel nuts before jack point as shown.
raising the vehicle. Make sure the jack is positioned on
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise a level and solid place.
to loosen. To get maximum leverage, JACK POINTS:
fit the wrench to the nut so that the Front—Under the frame side rail
handle is on the right side, as shown Rear—Under the rear axle housing
above. Grab the wrench near the end
of the handle and pull up on the han-
dle. Be careful that the wrench does
not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-
screw them about one- half turn.

339

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Raising your vehicle

Front of
vehicle

Put a jack handle, jack handle exten- When connecting the jack handle ex- 6. After making sure that no one
sions and jack handle end together tension(s) and jack handle end, use is in the vehicle, as the jack
as shown in the illustration. the jack handle to tighten the square touches the vehicle and begins
1. Jack handle end head bolt. Make sure that the bolt fits to fit, double- check that it is
2. Jack handle extensions into the depression on the joint. properly positioned.
3. Jack handle When connecting the jack handle ex- Rear side only—
tension with the jack handle, tighten When positioning the jack under the
the round head bolt by hand. rear axle housing, make sure the
groove on the top of the jack fits with
NOTICE the rear axle housing.
Tighten the square head bolt
securely. Otherwise, the exten-
sion may come off and it may
damage the paint or vehicle
body.

340

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Changing wheels

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.

7. Raise the vehicle high enough 8. Remove the wheel nuts and
so that the spare tire can be change tires.
installed. Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
Remember you will need more ground aside.
clearance when putting on the spare Roll the spare wheel into position and
tire than when removing the flat tire. align the holes in the wheel with the
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
handle end into the jack (it is a loose at least the top bolt started through
fit) and turn it clockwise with the han- its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
dle. back over the other bolts.

341

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a seri-
ous accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.

Before putting on wheels, remove any 9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-
corrosion on the mounting surfaces ger tight.
with a wire brush or such. Installation Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
of wheels without good metal- to- met- inward) and tighten them as much as
al contact at the mounting surface can you can by hand. Press back on the
cause wheel nuts to loosen and tire back and see if you can tighten
eventually cause a wheel to come off them more.
while driving.

342

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Lowering your vehicle —Reinstalling wheel ornament

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle,

make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.

Have the wheel nuts tightened
with torque wrench to 110 N·m
(11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon
as possible after changing
10.Lower the vehicle completely wheels. Otherwise, the nuts 11. Reinstall the wheel ornament.
and tighten the wheel nuts. may loosen and the wheels Put the wheel ornament into position
Turn the jack handle extension coun- may fall off, which could cause and then tap it firmly with the side or
terclockwise with handle to lower the a serious accident. heel of your hand to snap it into place.
vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any addition-
al leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely en-
gaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.
343

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—After changing wheels

12.Check the air pressure of the re-
CAUTION placed tire. CAUTION

Do not attach a heavily dam- Adjust the air pressure to the specifi- Before driving, make sure all the
aged plastic wheel ornament. cation designated on page 406 in tools, jack and flat tire are se-
It may fly off the wheel and Section 8. If the pressure is lower, curely in place in their storage
cause accidents while the ve- drive slowly to the nearest service location to reduce the possibility
hicle is moving. station and fill to the correct pressure. of personal injury during a colli-

Take due care in handling the Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla- sion or sudden braking.
ornament to avoid unexpected tion valve cap as dirt and moisture
personal injury. could get into the valve core and
possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
13.Restow all the tools, jack and
flat tire securely.
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified on page 406 in Sec-
tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have a
technician repair the flat tire.

344

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If your vehicle needs to be

If your vehicle becomes stuck towed—
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
NOTICE (a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it If you rock your vehicle, observe the
forward and backward. following precautions to prevent dam- —From front
Turn off the traction control system to age to the transmission and other
become unstuck to allow the tires to parts.
spin enough to remove the vehicle from
Do not depress the accelerator ped-
the obstruction. (For details, see “Trac- al while shifting the selector lever
tion control system” on page 168 in or before the transmission is com-
Section 1- 7.) pletely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
CAUTION —From rear

Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and back-
If your vehicle remains stuck after
ward if people or objects are any- rocking the vehicle several times,
where near the vehicle. During the consider other ways such as tow-
rocking operation the vehicle may ing.
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
(b) Using flat bed truck
or damage to nearby people or ob-
jects.

Two- wheel drive models

345

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If towing is necessary, we recommend TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck— you to have it done by your Toyota Use a safety chain system for all towing,
dealer or a commercial tow truck ser- and abide by the state/provincial and local
vice. In consultation with them, have laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
—From front
your vehicle towed using either (a) or must be in good condition. If they are
(b). damaged, use a towing dolly.
Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or com- CAUTION
mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-
hicle carefully in accordance with the Vehicles with rear height control air
instructions given in “—Emergency tow- suspension: When your vehicle is
—From rear ing” on page 348 in this Section. towed, put the vehicle height in the
Proper equipment will help ensure that “N” (normal) mode and push the
your vehicle is not damaged while being “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to
towed. Commercial operators are generally turn off the rear height control air
aware of the state/provincial and local suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle
laws pertaining to towing. height may be changed in the auto-
matic leveling function, resulting in
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is accident. For details, see “Rear
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
height control air suspension” on
(b) Using flat bed truck know the correct procedure, it is possible page 182 in Section 1- 7.
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following pre-
cautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.

Four- wheel drive models

346

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Two- wheel drive models— Four- wheel drive models—

NOTICE
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck (a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

When lifting wheels, take care to
From front—Use a towing dolly under the FULL- TIME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
ensure adequate ground clearance
rear wheels. MODELS
for towing at the opposite end of
Use a towing dolly under the wheels not the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the
NOTICE
lifted by the truck. bumper and/or underbody of the
Never tow a vehicle from the front MULTI- MODE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE towed vehicle will be damaged dur-
with the rear wheels on the ground, MODELS ing towing.
as this may cause serious damage to
Do not tow with the key removed or
From front—Use a towing dolly under the
the transmission. in the “LOCK” position when tow-
rear wheels.
ing from the rear without a towing
From rear—Place the ignition key in the NOTICE dolly. The steering lock mechanism
“ACC” position. is not strong enough to hold the
Never tow a vehicle from the front front wheels straight.
NOTICE with the rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to

When lifting wheels, take care to (b) Using flat bed truck
the transmission.
ensure adequate ground clearance
for towing at the opposite end of
From rear—We recommend using a tow-
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the
ing dolly under the front wheels. If you do
bumper and/or underbody of the
not use a towing dolly, place the ignition
towed vehicle will be damaged dur-
key in the “ACC” position, put the trans-
ing towing.
mission in “N” and the multi- mode control

Do not tow with the key removed or switch knob in “H2”.
in the “LOCK” position, as the
steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

347

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Emergency towing
(c) Towing with sling NOTICE
type truck

Only use specified towing eyelet;
otherwise your vehicle may be dam-
aged.

Never tow a vehicle from the rear
with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to
the transmission.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
All models— If towing is necessary, we recommend on hard- surfaced roads for a short dis-
(c) Towing with sling type truck you to have it done by your Toyota tance and at low speeds. Also, the
dealer or a commercial tow truck ser- wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
NOTICE vice. brakes must all be in good condition.
If towing service is not available in an
Do not tow with sling type truck, ei- CAUTION
emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-
ther from the front or rear. This may
rarily towed by a cable or chain se-
cause body damage. Use extreme caution when towing ve-
cured to one of the emergency towing
eyelets under the front of the vehicle. hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
Use extreme caution when towing the driving maneuvers which would place
vehicles. excessive stress on the emergency
towing eyelet and towing cable or
chain. The eyelet and towing cable or
chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

348

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Emergency towing eyelet

precautions

Before emergency towing, check that
NOTICE CAUTION
the eyelet is not broken or damaged
Use only a cable or chain specifically and that the installation bolts are not
loose. If the emergency towing eyelet is
intended for use in towing vehicles.
used to get out when your vehicle
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
Fasten the towing cable or chain se- becomes struck in mud, sand or oth-
the towing eyelet provided. curely to the eyelet.
er condition from which the vehicle

Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady cannot be driven out under its own
Before towing, release the parking brake and even force. power, make sure to observe the pre-
and put the transmission in “N”. The key

To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,
must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” excessive stress will be put on the
pull from the side or at a vertical
(engine running). eyelet and the towing cable or chain
angle. Always pull straight ahead.
Four- wheel drive models—On multi- mode may break, causing serious injury or
four- wheel drive models, put the multi- damage.
mode control switch knob in “H2”. On full-
If the towing vehicle can hardly
time four- wheel drive models, unlock the move, do not forcibly continue the
center differential. towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
CAUTION for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
If the engine is not running, the pow-
as possible.
er assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
Keep away from the vehicle during
will be much harder than usual. towing.

349

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Tips for towing a stuck If you cannot shift automatic

vehicle transmission selector lever
The following methods are effective to
get out when your vehicle is struck in
mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power. Use extreme cau-
tion when towing vehicles. In addition,
keep away from the vehicles and towing
cable or chain when towing.

Remove the soil and sand in the front
and the back of the tires.

Place a stone or wood under the tires.

If you cannot shift the selector lever 3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent
out of the “P” position to other posi- into the hole to push down the shift
tions even though the brake pedal is lock override button. You can shift
depressed, use the shift lock override out of the “P” position only while
button as follows: pushing the button.
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” 4. Shift into the “N” position.
position. Make sure the parking 5. Insert the cover.
brake is set.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
2. Pry up the cover with a flathead keep the brake pedal depressed.
screwdriver or equivalent.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

350

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

If you lose your wireless

If you lose your keys remote control transmitter
You can purchase a new key at your Please contact your nearest Toyota
Toyota dealer if you can give them the dealer and you can purchase a new
key number and master key. wireless remote control transmitter.
Even if you lose only one key, contact Have the registered identification numbers
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If of your transmitters deleted from your ve-
you lose all your master keys, you cannot hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
make new keys; the whole engine immobi- possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
lizer system must be replaced. an accident. Then, have the identification
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on number of your new transmitter registered.
page 12 in Section 1- 2. At the same time, you must bring all of
the remaining transmitters to have them
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and registered again as well.
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window be-
cause it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

351

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

352

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 5
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Rain clearing mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

353

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Protecting your Toyota from

corrosion
Toyota, through the diligent research, de-
Wetness or dampness to certain parts
High pressure water or steam is effec-
sign and use of the most advanced of your vehicle for an extended period tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
technology available, helps prevent corro- of time, may cause corrosion even and wheel housings. Pay particular
sion and provides you with the finest qual- though other parts of the vehicle may attention to these areas as it is difficult
ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to be dry. to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
High ambient temperatures can cause more harm than good to simply wet the
ensure long- term corrosion prevention. corrosion to those components of the mud and debris without removing. The
The most common causes of corrosion vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
to your vehicle are: lack of proper ventilation. frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and The above signifies the necessity to keep as trapped water in these areas can
moisture in hard- to- reach areas under your vehicle, particularly the underside, as cause corrosion.
the vehicle. clean as possible and to repair any dam-

Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-

Chipping of paint, or undercoating age to paint or protective coatings as
oughly when winter is over.
caused by minor accidents or by soon as possible.
stones and gravel. To help prevent corrosion on your See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
Toyota, follow these guidelines: page 355 in this Section for more tips.
Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your ve- Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of Check the condition of your vehicle’s
hicle under certain environmental condi- course, necessary to keep your vehicle paint and trim. If you find any chips or
tions: clean by regular washing, but to prevent scratches in the paint, touch them up im-
mediately to prevent corrosion from start-

Road salt or dust control chemicals will corrosion, the following points should be
ing. If the chips or scratches have gone
accelerate corrosion, as will the pres- observed:
through the bare metal, have a qualified
ence of salt in the air near the sea-
If you drive on salted roads in the body shop make the repair.
coast or in areas of industrial pollution. winter or if you live near the ocean,

High humidity accelerates corrosion es- you should hose off the undercarriage
pecially when temperatures range just at least once a month to minimize cor-
above the freezing point. rosion.

354

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Washing and waxing your

Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa- Washing your Toyota 1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-
ter and dirt can accumulate under the Keep your vehicle clean by regular move any mud or road salt from the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc- washing. underside of the vehicle or the wheel
casionally check under the mats to make wells.
sure the area is dry. Be particularly care- The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and 2. Wash with a mild car- wash soap,
ful when transporting chemicals, cleans- mixed according to the manufacturer’s
ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-
sible. instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
transported in proper containers. If a spill keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
or leak should occur, immediately clean
When driving in a coastal area the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
and dry the area.
When driving on a road sprinkled with the soap and water remove the dirt.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you antifreeze Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high-
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, pressure car wash, for example) at or
shields help protect your vehicle. Full- size bird droppings and carcass of an insect near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
shields, which come as near to the ground door opened. If the water enters the air
as possible, are the best. We recommend
When driving in areas where there is
a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or vent, you may experience trouble with re-
that the fittings and the area where the fueling or rough engine idling.
shields are installed be treated to resist chemical substances
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
When the vehicle becomes remarkably Rear height control air suspension: Do not
happy to assist in supplying and installing dirty with dust and mud spray a jet of high- pressure water at the
the shields if they are recommended for air suspension unit, especially the air
Hand- washing your Toyota spring, at an extremely close range. This
your area.
Work in the shade and wait until the may damage the air suspension.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated vehicle body is not warm to the touch.
garage or a roofed place. Do not park Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti- wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
CAUTION organic substances. If any organic sub-
lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with stances splash an ornament, be sure to
When cleaning under floor or chassis, wash them off with water and check if the
water or snow, your garage may be so
be careful not to injure your hands. ornament is damaged.
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-
rode if the ventilation is poor.

355

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap Waxing your Toyota

NOTICE
or neutral detergent. Polishing and waxing is recommended
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
Do not use organic substances to maintain the original beauty of your
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or Toyota’s finish.
faces are soft. strong solvents), which may be tox-
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
ic or cause damage.
Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use surface does not repel water well.
organic substances or scrub them with a
Do not scrub any part of the ve-
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-
hard brush. This may damage the sur- hicle with a hard brush, which may
fore you begin waxing, even if you are
faces of the lights. cause damage.
using a combined cleaner and wax.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or 2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
cleaners that are marked safe for painted Automatic car wash
the finish has become extremely weath-
surfaces. Your vehicle may be washed in an auto- ered, use a car- cleaning polish, fol-
3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can matic car wash, but remember that the lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-
cause streaking. In hot weather you paint can be scratched by some types of low the manufacturer’s instructions and
may need to rinse each section right brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
after you wash it. washing process itself. Scratching reduces the chrome trim as well as the paint.
paint durability and gloss, especially on
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle 3. Wax the vehicle again when water
darker colors. The manager of the car
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not does not bead but remains on the sur-
wash should be able to advise you wheth-
rub or press hard—you might scratch face in large patches.
er the process is safe for the paint on
the paint. Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the
your vehicle.
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or
wash it off.

356

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Cleaning the interior

Vinyl interior
NOTICE CAUTION
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
Always remove the plastic bumpers if cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
your vehicle is re- painted and placed
Vehicles with side airbags and cur-
and water.
in a high heat paint waxing booth. tain shield airbags:
First vacuum over the upholstery to re-
High temperatures could damage the Be careful not to splash water or
bumpers. spill liquid on the floor. This may move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
prevent the side airbags and curtain
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
shield airbags from activating cor-
rectly, resulting in serious injury. minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp

Do not wash the vehicle floor with cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,
water, or allow water to get onto repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-
the floor when cleaning the vehicle ing- type vinyl cleaners are also available
interior or exterior. Water may get which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
into audio components or other instructions.
electrical components above or un-
der the floor carpet (or mat) and NOTICE
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion. Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.

357

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Carpets
NOTICE NOTICE
Use a good foam- type shampoo to
clean the carpets.
Do not use dye or bleach on the
Do not use organic substances (sol-
belts—it may weaken them. vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove

Do not use the belts until they be- etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
come dry. These chemicals can cause discol-
foam cleaners are available; some are in
oring, staining or peeling of the
aerosol cans and others are powders or
surface.
liquids which you mix with water to pro- Windows
duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
If you use cleaners or polishing
The windows may be cleaned with any agents, make sure their ingredients
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
household window cleaner. do not include the substances men-
Rub in overlapping circles.
tioned above.
Do not apply water—the best results are NOTICE
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
If you use a liquid car freshener, do
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
When cleaning the inside of the not apill the liquid onto the ve-
and follow them closely. rear window, be careful not to hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-
scratch or damage the heater wires tain the ingredients mentioned
Seat belts or connectors. above. Immediately clean any spill
The seat belts may be cleaned with
When cleaning the inside of the using the method mentioned above.
mild soap and water or with lukewarm rear quarter window, be careful not
water. to scratch or damage the printed Leather interior
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean- antenna.
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
ing, check the belts for excessive wear,
with neutral detergent for wool.
fraying, or cuts. Air conditioning control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, console panel Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
and switches with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning. of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-
warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

358

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Rain clearing mirrors

After cleaning or whenever any part of the On some models, the outside rear view
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
The interior of your vehicle is apt mirrors have been coated to produce a
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti- to heat up on hot summer days, so “rain clearing” effect. This coating
lated shaded area. avoid placing on the upholstery causes the raindrops to spread, clear-
items made of vinyl or plastic or ing the driver’s rear view when it rains.
NOTICE containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm. It is sufficient to wash the mirrors with

If a stain should fail to come out water for day to day care.

Improper cleaning of the leather up-
with a neutral detergent, apply a The rain clearing effect is reduced in
holstery could result in discolor-
cleaner that does not contain an drizzle and light rain.
ation or staining.
organic solvent.
In the following cases, the rain clearing

Never use organic substances such If you have any questions about the effect will be reduced temporarily, but will
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or cleaning of your Toyota, your local gradually recover.
alkaline or acid solutions for clean- Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
After wiping dirt off the mirrors
ing the leather as these could them.
cause discoloring.
When the mirrors fog up

Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
After waxing your vehicle in an auto-
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the matic car wash
fine grained surface of the leather.
After your vehicle has been parked for

Mildew may develop on soiled leath- a long period in underground parking
er upholstery. Be especially careful lots, etc. where there is no direct sun-
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your light.
upholstery always clean. If you would like to restore the rain clear-

Long exposure to direct sunlight ing effect to its normal level immediately
may cause the leather surface to in the above cases, wash the mirrors with
harden and shrink. Keep your ve- neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.
hicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.

359

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

NOTICE
To maintain the rain clearing ability,
and prevent the mirrors from being
scratched, observe the following pre-
cautions.

Do not use any glass cleaners that
contain compounds.

If ice should jam the mirror, do not
scrape the mirror. Use a spray de-
icer to free the mirror.

Wash off any wax stuck to the mir-
rors with neutral detergent and
rinse thoroughly as any wax on the
surface of the mirrors can cause
the rain clearing effect to be lost.

Do not use any water repellents as
they can destroy the rain clearing
effect. If any repellent gets stuck on
the surface of the mirrors, wash it
off with neutral detergent, then
rinse thoroughly.

360

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . . 366

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

361

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for Scheduled maintenance Where to go for service?
fewer maintenance requirements with long- The scheduled maintenance items listed in Toyota technicians are well- trained spe-
er service intervals to save both your time the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or cialists and are kept up to date with the
and money. However, each regular mainte- “Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those latest service information through technical
nance, as well as day- to- day care, is required to be serviced at regular inter- bulletins, service tips, and in- dealership
more important than ever before to ensure vals. training programs. They learn to work on
smooth, and trouble- free, safe, and eco- Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
nomical drivings. For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” rather than while they are working on it.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. You can be confident that your Toyota
sure the specified maintenance, including dealer’s service department performs the
general maintenance service, is performed. It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the best job to meet the maintenance require-
Note that both the new vehicle and emis- ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-
sion control system warranties specify that repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied. nomically.
proper maintenance and care must be per-
formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa- The owner may elect to use non- Toyota Your copy of the repair order is proof that
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple- supplied parts for replacement pur- all required maintenance has been per-
ment” for complete warranty information. poses without invalidating the emission formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-
control system warranty. However, use lems should arise with your vehicle while
General maintenance under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
of replacement parts which are not of
General maintenance items are those day- equivalent quality may impair the effec- promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to- day care practices that are important to tiveness of the emission control sys- to keep a copy of the repair order for any
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the tems. service performed on your Toyota.
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the What about do- it- yourself maintenance?
general maintenance items are performed You may also elect to have mainte-
regularly. nance, replacement, or repair of the Many of the maintenance items are easy
emission control devices and system to do yourself if you have a little mechani-
These checks or inspections can be done performed by any automotive repair es- cal ability and a few basic automotive
either by yourself or a qualified technician, tablishment or individual without invali- tools. Simple instructions for how to per-
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War- form them are presented on page 367 in
pleased to do them at a nominal cost. ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Section 7.
Manual Supplement” for complete war-
ranty information.
362

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

General maintenance
If you are a skilled do- it- yourself mechan- Listed below are the general maintenance Engine coolant level
ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom- items that should be performed as fre- Make sure the coolant level is between
mended. Please be aware that do- it- your- quently as specified. In addition to check- the “F” and “L” lines on the see- through
self maintenance can affect your warranty ing the items listed, if you notice any reservoir when the engine is cold. See
coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa- unusual noise, smell or vibration, you page 378 in Section 7- 2 for additional
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple- should investigate the cause or take your information.
ment” for the details. vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-
fied service shop immediately. It is recom- Radiator, condenser and hoses
mended that any problem you notice be Check that the front of the radiator and
brought to the attention of your dealer or condenser are clean and not blocked with
the qualified service shop for their advice. leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 379 in
Section 7- 2 for additional information.
CAUTION Battery condition
Check the battery condition by the indica-
Make these checks only with ade-
tor color. See page 390 in Section 7- 3 for
quate ventilation if you run the en-
additional information.
gine.
Brake fluid level
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 380 in Section 7- 2 for addition-
Items listed below should be checked
al information.
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling. Engine oil level
Washer fluid Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
on a level spot. See page 376 in Section
tank. See page 393 in Section 7- 3 for
7- 2 for additional information.
additional information.

363

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Power steering fluid level Seats Brakes

Check the level through the reservoir. The Check that all front seat controls such as In a safe place, check that the brakes do
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD” seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op- not pull to one side when applied.
range depending on the fluid temperature. erate smoothly and that all latches lock Parking brake
See page 381 in Section 7- 2 for addition- securely in any position. Check that the
al information. head restraint move up and down smooth- Check that the pedal has the proper travel
ly and that the locks hold securely in any and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
Exhaust system is held securely with only the parking
latched position. For folding- down rear
If you notice any change in the sound of seatbacks and swing- up rear seat cush- brake applied.
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have ions (vehicles without third seats), tum- Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-
the cause located and corrected immedi- bling second seats (vehicles with third nism
ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on seats), folding- up third seats and detach-
page 287 in Section 2.) On a safe incline, check that your vehicle
able third seats, check that the latches is held securely with the selector lever in
INSIDE THE VEHICLE lock securely. “P” position and all brakes released.
Items listed below should be checked Seat belts OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic Check that the seat belt system such as
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Items listed below should be performed
buckles, retractors and anchors operate from time to time, unless otherwise
Lights properly and smoothly. Make sure that the specified.
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or
damaged. Fluid leaks
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim. Accelerator pedal Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-
ter or other fluid after the vehicle has
Service reminder indicators and warning Check the pedal for smooth operation and been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
buzzers uneven pedal effort or catching. fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
Check that all service reminder indicators Brake pedal found and corrected immediately.
and warning buzzers function properly. Check the pedal for smooth operation and
Steering wheel that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check that it has the specified free play. Check the brake booster function.
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.
364

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Does your vehicle need

repairing?
Doors and engine hood Be on the alert for changes in perfor- If you notice any of these clues, take your
Check that all doors including back door mance, sounds, and visual tip- offs that vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
operate smoothly and all latches lock se- indicate service is needed. Some impor- possible. It probably needs adjustment or
curely. Make sure the engine hood sec- tant clues are as follows: repair.
ondary latch secures the hood from open-
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
ing when the primary latch is released. CAUTION

Appreciable loss of power
Tire inflation pressure
Strange engine noises Do not continue driving with the ve-
Check the pressure with a gauge ev-
A leak under the vehicle (however, wa- hicle unchecked. It could result in se-
ery two weeks, or at least once a ter dripping from the air conditioning rious vehicle damage and possibly
month. See page 381 in Section 7- 2 after use is normal.) personal injury.
for additional information.
Change in exhaust sound (This may
Tire surface and wheel nuts indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
Check the tires carefully for cuts, have the exhaust system checked im-
damage or excessive wear. See page mediately.)
384 in Section 7- 2 for additional in-
formation. When checking the tires,
Flat- looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear
make sure no nuts are missing, and
check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
them if necessary. straight on a level road

Tire rotation
Strange noises related to suspension

movement
Rotate the tires according to the
Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
maintenance schedule. (For sched- feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
uled maintenance information, please touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance when braking
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

Engine coolant temperature continually
ment”.) See page 386 in Section 7- 2 higher than normal
for additional information.

365

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission in- The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
spection programs which include OBD after taking several driving trips, but the
(On- Board Diagnostics) checks. error code in the OBD system will not be
The OBD system monitors the operation cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
of the emission control system. When the taken.
OBD system determines that a problem If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
exists somewhere in the emission control even the malfunction indicator lamp does
system, the malfunction indicator lamp not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may to prepare the vehicle for re- testing.
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp
does not come on, your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test as readiness codes
have not been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary mal-
function such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

366

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 7- 1
DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Do- it- yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

367

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Engine compartment overview

1GR- FE engine
1. Windshield and back window washer
fluid tank
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil level dipstick
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Fuse block
8. Battery
9. Condenser
10. Radiator

368

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

2UZ- FE engine
1. Windshield and back window washer
fluid tank
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil level dipstick
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Fuse block
8. Battery
9. Condenser
10. Radiator

369

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Do- it- yourself service

Fuse locations precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
Spare given in this Section.
fuses
You should be aware that improper or in-
complete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing do- it- yourself maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do-
it- yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 372 in this Section.
Utmost care should be taken when work-
ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental
injury. Here are a few precautions that
you should be especially careful to ob-
serve:

370

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CAUTION  Use eye protection whenever you NOTICE

work on or under your vehicle

Remember that battery and ignition
 When the engine is running, keep where you may be exposed to flying
cables carry high currents or volt-
hands, clothing, and tools away or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
ages. Be careful of accidentally
from the moving fan and engine  Used engine oil contains potentially causing a short circuit.
drive belts. (Removing rings, harmful contaminants which may
watches, and ties is advisable.)
Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
cause skin disorders such as in-
Coolant” or similar high quality eth-
 Right after driving, the engine flammation or skin cancer, so care
ylene glycol based non- silicate,
compartment—the engine, radiator, should be taken to avoid prolonged
non- amine, non- nitrite, and non- bo-
exhaust manifold, power steering and repeated contact with it. To re-
rate coolant with long- life hybrid
fluid reservoir and spark plug move used engine oil from your
organic acid technology to fill the
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care- skin, wash thoroughly with soap
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids and water.
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-
and spark plugs may also be hot.  Do not leave used oil within the ant and 50% deionized water (for
 If the engine is hot, do not remove reach of children. the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
the radiator cap or loosen the drain  Dispose of used oil and filter only deionized water (for Canada).
plugs to prevent burning yourself. in a safe and acceptable manner.
If you spill some of the coolant, be
 Do not leave anything that may Do not dispose of used oil and fil- sure to wash it off with water to
burn easily, such as paper or rags, ter in household trash, in sewers or prevent it from damaging the parts
in the engine compartment. onto the ground. Call your dealer or or paint.
 Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- a service station for information

Do not allow dirt or anything else
low open flames around fuel or the concerning recycling or disposal.
to fall through the spark plug holes.
battery. Their fumes are flammable.  Be extremely cautious when work-
Use only spark plugs of the speci-
 Do not get under your vehicle with ing on the battery. It contains poi-
fied type. Using other types will
just the body jack supporting it. Al- sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
cause engine damage, loss of per-
ways use automotive jack stands or formance or radio noise.
other solid supports.

Do not reuse iridium- tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.

371

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Parts and tools

Here is a list of parts and tools you will Tools:

Do not overfill automatic transmis-
sion fluid, or the transmission
need to perform do- it- yourself mainte-  Funnel (only for adding coolant)
nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-
could be damaged. signed in metric sizes, so your tools must CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Do not drive with the air cleaner be metric. Parts (if level is low):
filter removed, or excessive engine CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL  SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
wear could result. Also backfiring brake fluid
could cause a fire in the engine Parts (if level is low):
compartment.  “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva- Tools:

Be careful not to scratch the glass lent  Rag or paper towel
surface with the wiper frame. See page 377 in Section 7- 2 for de-  Funnel (only for adding fluid)

When closing the engine hood, tails about engine oil selection. CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID
check to see that you have not for- Tools: Parts (if level is low):
gotten any tools, rags, etc.  Rag or paper towel  Automatic transmission fluid
 Funnel (only for adding oil) DEXRONII or III
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT Tools:
LEVEL  Rag or paper towel
Parts (if level is low):  Funnel (only for adding fluid)
 “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non- silicate, non- amine, non- ni- Tools:
trite, and non- borate coolant with long-  Warm water
life hybrid organic acid technology.  Baking soda
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a  Grease
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-
ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%  Conventional wrench (for terminal
coolant and 45% deionized water (for clamp bolts)
Canada).

372

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):
 Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:
 Water
 Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for
winter use)
Tools:
 Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:
 Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original (See charts in “Re-
placing light bulbs” on page 394 in
Section 7- 3.)
Tools:
 Screwdriver

373

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

374

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 7- 2
DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

375

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking the engine oil level

With the engine at operating tempera- If the oil level is below or only slightly
Low level Full level ture and turned off, check the oil level above the low level, add engine oil of
on the dipstick. the same type as already in the engine.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
should be on level ground. After turning oil in small quantities at a time, checking
off the engine, wait a few minutes for the dipstick. We recommend that you use
the oil to drain back into the bottom of a funnel when adding oil.
the engine. The approximate quantity of oil needed to
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under raise the level between low and full on the
the end and wipe it clean. dipstick is indicated as follows:
Add oil O.K. Too full 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be For the engine oil capacity, see “Service
correct. specifications” on page 403 in Section 8.
1GR- FE engine
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil When the level reaches within the correct
level while holding a rag under the range, install the filler cap hand- tight.
end.
Low level Full level NOTICE
CAUTION

Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
Be careful not to touch the hot ex-
haust manifold.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine
could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstick
NOTICE once again after adding the oil.

Add oil O.K. Too full Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.

2UZ- FE engine

376

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION If SAE 5W- 30 is not available, SAE

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in 10W- 30 may be used. However, it
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved should be replaced with SAE 5W- 30 at
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent the next oil change.
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
API grade SL “Energy- Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W- 30

API service symbol

Outside temperature

SAE 5W- 30 is the best choice for good

fuel economy and good starting in cold
weather.
ILSAC certification mark

377

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking the engine coolant

level
Oil identification marks Look at the see- through coolant reser-
Either or both API registered marks are voir when the engine is cold. The cool-
added to some oil containers to help ant level is satisfactory if it is between
you select the oil you should use. the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, add the coolant. (For
The API Service Symbol is located any- the coolant type, see “Coolant type
where on the outside of the container. selection” described below.)
The top portion of the label shows the oil The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
quality by API (American Petroleum Insti- with engine temperature. However, if the
tute) designations such as SL. The center level is on or below the “L” line, add
portion of the label shows the SAE viscos- coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.
ity grade such as SAE 5W- 30. “Energy-
Conserving” shown in the lower portion, If the coolant level drops within a short
indicates that the oil has fuel- saving ca- time after replenishing, there may be a
pabilities. leak in the system. Visually check the
To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-
mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan- cock and water pump.
dardization and Approval Committee) Certi- Motor Oil” is available, which has been
fication Mark is displayed on the front of specifically tested and approved for all If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
the container. Toyota engines. dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”. CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

remove the radiator cap when the en-
gine is hot.

378

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking the radiator and

condenser
Coolant type selection If any of the above parts are extremely
Use of improper coolants may damage dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
your engine cooling system. tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

CAUTION
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non- silicate, non- amine, non- nitrite, To prevent burning yourself, be care-
and non- borate coolant with long- life
ful not to touch the radiator or con-
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
denser when the engine is hot.
with long- life hybrid organic acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.) NOTICE
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and To prevent damage to the radiator
50% deionized water. This coolant pro- Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
and condenser, do not perform the
vides protection down to about -35C Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
work by yourself.
(- 31F). ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life result in malfunction of your engine
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
45% deionized water. This coolant pro- Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
vides protection down to about -42C with long- life hybrid organic acid
(- 44F). technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
NOTICE malfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.

379

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking brake fluid

Refilling brake fluid:
NOTICE
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 20
to wipe it off to prevent it from dam-
times (until the brake pedal resistance
aging the parts or paintwork.
decreases and pedal travel increases).
3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.
Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.
If you do not follow the procedure above,
the reservoir may overflow.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.
To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see- through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and CAUTION
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
Take care when filling the reservoir
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go because brake fluid can harm your
down slightly as the brake pads wear or hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
when the fluid level in the accumulator is hands or in your eyes, flush the af-
high. fected area with clean water immedi-
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it ately. If you still feel uncomfortable
may indicate a serious mechanical prob- with your hands or eyes, go to the
lem. doctor.
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.

380

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking tire inflation

Checking power steering fluid pressure
Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-
ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. If
If cold O.K. the fluid is cold, the level should be in the
If hot O.K.
“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the
Close
Open fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.
If the level is at the low side of either
range, add automatic transmission fluid
If cold DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
add
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-
If hot
add terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-
voir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
Check the fluid level through the reser- for leaks or damage.
voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-
mission fluid DEXRONII or III. CAUTION
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little The reservoir tank may be hot so be
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is careful not to burn yourself.
hot (60C—80C or 140F—175F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is cold (about room temperature, NOTICE
10C—30C or 50F—85F) if the engine
Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-
has not been run for about five hours.
ing could be damaged.

381

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Keep your tire inflation pressures
If you cannot adjust the tire
Tire pressure gauge
at the proper level. pressure when the tires are
The recommended cold tire inflation cold, add 20 to 30 kPa more to
pressures, tire sizes and the com- the front tires and rear tires than
bined weight of occupants and cargo the cold tire pressure, but never
(vehicle capacity weight) are de- exceed the maximum cold tire
scribed on pages 402 and 406. They pressure molded on the tire side-
are also on the tire and loading infor- wall.
mation label.
Always use a tire pressure
You should check the tire inflation gauge. The appearance of a tire
pressure every two weeks, or at least can be misleading. Besides, tire
once a month. And do not forget the inflation pressures that are even
spare! just a few pounds off can degrade
ride and handling. INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
The following instructions for PROCEDURE
checking tire inflation pressure
Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving. 1. Remove the tire valve cap.
should be observed:
It is normal for the tire inflation 2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

The pressure should be pressure to be higher after driving. gauge to the tire valve.
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
Never exceed the vehicle capac- 3. Read the pressure using the grad-
parked for at least 3 hours and has ity weight. Passenger and lug- uations of the gauge.
not been driven for more than 1.5 gage weight should be located so 4. In case the tire inflation pressure
km or 1 mile since, you will get that the vehicle is balanced. is not within the prescribed range,
an accurate cold tire inflation pres- insert the compressed air from the
sure reading. valve. In case of applying too
much air, press the center of the
valve and release the air to adjust.

382

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

5. After completing the tire inflation Incorrect tire inflation pressure may
pressure measurement and ad- waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-
Wheel deformation and/or tire
justment, apply soapy water to the ing, reduce tire life and make your ve- separation
valve and check for leakage. hicle less safe to drive.
A greater possibility of tire
6. Install the tire valve cap. If a tire frequently needs refilling, damage from road hazards
If a gauge and air pump are not avail- have it checked by your Toyota deal- High tire pressure (overinfla-
able, have your vehicle checked by er. tion)—
your Toyota dealer.
Poor handling
CAUTION

Excessive wear
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Uneven wear
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve Otherwise, the following condi-
A greater possibility of tire
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt tions may occur and cause an ac- damage from road hazards
or moisture could get into the cident resulting in death or seri-
valve core and cause air leakage. ous injuries.
If the caps have been lost, have Low tire pressure (underinfla-
new ones put on as soon as pos- tion)—
sible.
Excessive wear

Uneven wear
NOTICE
Poor handling
Use only the original valve cap.
Possibility of blowouts from an
If any other valve cap is used, overheated tire
it may corrode or melt and be-
Poor sealing of the tire bead
come difficult or impossible to
remove.

383

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking and replacing tires

The tires on your Toyota have built- in If air loss occurs while driving, do not
Tread wear indicator tread wear indicators to help you continue driving. Driving even a short
know when the tires need replace- distance can damage a tire beyond
ment. When the tread depth wears to repair.
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica- Any tires which are over 6 years
tors will appear. If you can see the old must be checked by a qualified
indicators in two or more adjacent technician even if damage is not
grooves, the tire should be replaced. obvious.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding. Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below This applies also to the spare tire and
4 mm (0.16 in.). tires stored for future use.
CHECKING YOUR TIRES
If you have tire damage such as
Check the tire’s tread for tread cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
wear indicators. If the indicators expose the fabric, or bulges indi-
show, replace the tires. The loca- cating internal damage, the tire
tion of tread wear indicators is should be replaced.
shown by the “TWI” or “∆ ” marks,
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
etc., molded on the sidewall of
each tire. properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

384

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

REPLACING YOUR TIRES For details about the side wall of the
tire and the Certification Label, see
Four- wheel drive models:
When replacing a tire, use a tire of Do not use tires of different
the same size and construction, pages 293 and 296.
brands, sizes, construction or
and the same or greater maximum tread patterns, as this may
load as the originally installed CAUTION
cause dangerous handling
tires. Also, on four- wheel drive characteristics resulting in
models, all the tires must be the Observe the following instruc-
tions. Otherwise, an accident loss of control.
same brand and have the same
tread patterns. may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries. Toyota recommends all four tires,
Using any other size or type of tire or at least both of the front or rear
may seriously affect handling, ride,
Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias- ply tires on your ve- tires be replaced at a time as a set.
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance be- hicle, as this may cause dan- See “If you have a flat tire” on page
tween the body and tires or snow gerous handling characteris- 335 for tire change procedure.
chains. tics resulting in loss of control. When a tire is replaced, the wheel
Check that the maximum load of the
Do not use tires other than the should always be balanced.
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the manufacturer’s recommended An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) size, as this may cause danger- hicle handling and tire life. Wheels
of either the front axle or the rear ous handling characteristics can get out of balance with regular
axle, whichever is greater. As for the resulting in loss of control. use and should therefore be balanced
maximum load of the tire, see the load occasionally.
limit at maximum cold tire inflation When replacing a tubeless tire, the
pressure mentioned on the sidewall air valve should also be replaced
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle with a new one.
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-
tification Label.

385

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Installing snow tires and

Rotating tires chains
When rotating tires, check for uneven WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is CHAINS
usually caused by incorrect tire pres- Snow tires or chains are recommended
sure, improper wheel alignment, out- when driving on snow or ice.
of- balance wheels, or severe braking. On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.
SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Also, on four- wheel drive models, all
the tires must be the same brand and
have the same tread patterns.
To equalize the wear and help ex-
Do not use tires other than those men-
tend tire life, Toyota recommends tioned above. Do not install studded tires
that you rotate your tires accord- without first checking local regulations for
ing to the maintenance schedule. possible restrictions.
(For scheduled maintenance infor-
mation, please refer to the “Sched- CAUTION
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-
er’s Manual Supplement”.) Observe the following instructions.
However, the most appropriate tim- Otherwise, an accident may occur re-
ing for tire rotation may vary ac- sulting in death or serious injuries.
cording to your driving habits and
Do not use snow tires other than
road surface conditions. the manufacturer’s recommended si-
See “If you have a flat tire” on page ze, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in
335 in Section 4 for tire change proce-
loss of control.
dure.

386

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Four- wheel drive models:
Avoid sharp turns or locked- wheel
Use the tire chains of correct size.
Do not use snow tires of different braking, as use of chains may ad-
brands, sizes, construction or tread Regulations regarding the use of tire versely affect vehicle handling.
patterns, as this may cause danger- chains vary according to location or
When driving with chains installed,
ous handling characteristics result- type of road, so always check local reg-
be sure to drive carefully. Slow
ing in loss of control. ulations before installing chains. down before entering curves to
CHAIN INSTALLATION avoid losing control of the vehicle.
SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION Install the chains on the rear tires as Otherwise an accident may occur.
Snow tires should be installed on all tightly as possible. Do not use tire
wheels. chains on the front tires. Retighten
chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
(1/4—1/2 mile).
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front When installing chains on your tires, care-
and rear tires which could cause loss of fully follow the instructions of the chain
vehicle control. manufacturer.
When storing removed tires, you should If wheel covers are used, they will be
store them in a cool dry place. scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing. CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

CAUTION
the chain manufacturer’s recom-
mended speed limit, whichever is

Do not drive with the snow tires
lower.
incorrectly inflated.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
Drive carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
with any type of snow tires.
cause the vehicle to bounce.

387

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Replacing wheels Aluminum wheel precautions

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS Replacement with used wheels is not rec-
When installing aluminum wheels,
If you have wheel damage such as ommended as they may have been sub- check that the wheel nuts are tight
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the jected to rough treatment or high mileage after driving your vehicle the first 1600
wheel should be replaced. and could fail without warning. Also, bent km (1000 miles).
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
wheels which have been straightened may
If you have rotated, repaired or
have structural damage and therefore changed your tires, check that the
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause should not be used. Never use an inner
loss of handling control. wheel nuts are still tight after driving
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed 1600 km (1000 miles).
WHEEL SELECTION for a tubeless tire.

When using tire chains, be careful not
When replacing wheels, care should be to damage the aluminum wheels.
taken to ensure that the wheels are re- CAUTION
placed by ones with the same load ca-
Use only Toyota wheel nuts and
pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Observe the following instructions. wrench designed for your aluminum
Otherwise, an accident may occur re- wheels.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
sulting in death or serious injuries.
When balancing your wheels, use only

Do not use wheels other than the Toyota balance weights or equivalent
A wheel of a different size or type may and a plastic or rubber hammer.
manufacturer’s recommended size,
adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-
ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-
as this may cause dangerous han-
As with any wheel, periodically check
dling characteristics resulting in your aluminum wheels for damage. If
eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight
loss of control. damaged, replace immediately.
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-
ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
Four- wheel drive models:
the body and chassis. Do not use wheels of different
brands, sizes and types, as this
may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control.

388

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 7- 3
DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

389

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking battery condition—

—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

CAUTION
If electrolyte gets on your skin, Terminals

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS you feel pain or burning, get medi-
The battery produces flammable and cal attention immediately.
explosive hydrogen gas.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes,

Do not cause a spark from the bat- there is a possibility of its soaking
through to your skin, so immediate- Ground cable
tery with tools.
ly take off the exposed clothing and

Do not smoke or light a match near follow the procedure above, if nec-
the battery. essary.
Hold- down
The electrolyte contains poisonous
If you accidentally swallow electro- clamp
and corrosive sulfuric acid. lyte, drink a large quantity of water

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or or milk. Follow with milk of magne-
clothes. sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable Check the battery for corroded or loose
oil. Then go immediately for emer- terminal connections, cracks, or loose

Never ingest electrolyte. hold- down clamp.
gency help.

Wear protective safety glasses when a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
working near the battery. with a solution of warm water and bak-

Keep children away from the bat- ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-
tery. nals with grease to prevent further cor-
EMERGENCY MEASURES rosion.

If electrolyte gets in your eyes, b. If the terminal connections are loose,

flush your eyes with clean water tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
immediately and get immediate overtighten.
medical attention. If possible, con- c. Tighten the hold- down clamp only
tinue to apply water with a sponge enough to keep the battery firmly in
or cloth while en route to the medi- place. Overtightening may damage the
cal office. battery case.

390

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

During recharging, the battery is pro-
NOTICE Type A ducing hydrogen gas.

Be sure the engine and all accesso- Clear or light Therefore, before recharging:
ries are off before performing main- Green Dark yellow
1. If recharging with the battery installed
tenance.
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect

When checking the battery, remove the ground cable.
the ground cable from the negative Type B
2. Be sure the power switch on the re-
terminal (“- ” mark) first and rein-
Blue White Red charger is off when connecting the
stall it last.
charger cables to the battery and when

Be careful not to cause a short cir- disconnecting them.
cuit with tools.

Take care no solution gets into the CAUTION
battery when washing it.
CHECKING BY INDICATOR
Always charge the battery in an un-
If the battery is disconnected or run Check the battery condition by the indi- confined area. Do not charge the
down, the power window, power back win- cator color. battery in a garage or closed room
dow and moon roof may not operate auto- where there is not sufficient ventila-
matically and the jam protection function Indicator color tion.
Condition
will not function correctly, and does not Type A Type B
Only do a slow charge (5 A or
open the back door after you reconnect, less). Charging at a quicker rate is
replace or recharge the battery. In any of Green Blue Good dangerous. The battery may ex-
these cases, you should normalize the Charging necessary. plode, causing personal injuries.
power window, power back window, back Have battery
door and moon roof. To normalize them, Dark White
checked by your
see “Power windows” on page 27, “Power Toyota dealer. NOTICE
back window” on page 30, “Back door” on
Clear or Have battery Never recharge the battery while the
page 32 and “Electric moon roof” on page
light Red checked by your engine is running. Also, be sure all
38 in Section 1- 2.
yellow Toyota dealer. accessories are turned off.

391

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Checking and replacing fuses

Type A fuses can be pulled out by using
the pull- out tool. The location of the pull-
Type A out tool is shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Good Blown Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-
ing designated on the fuse box lid.
Type B If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “PWR
OUTLET” or “HEATER NO.2” fuse, which
If the headlights or other electrical may be dispensable for normal driving,
components do not work, check the and use it if its amperage rating is the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown, same.
they must be replaced.
Good Blown If you cannot use one of the same amper-
See “Fuse locations” on page 370 in Sec- age, use one that is lower, but as close
Type C tion 7- 1 for locations of the fuses. to the rating as possible. If the amperage
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative is lower than that specified, the fuse
component off. Pull the suspected fuse might blow out again but this does not
straight out and check it. indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
Determine which fuse may be causing the
return the substitute to its original clip.
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See It is a good idea to purchase a set of
Good Blown
page 406 in Section 8 for the functions spare fuses and keep them in your ve-
controlled by each circuit. hicle for emergencies.

392

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Adding washer fluid

If the new fuse immediately blows out, You may use plain water as washer fluid.
there is a problem with the electrical sys- However, in cold areas where tempera-
tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as tures range below the freezing point, use
soon as possible. washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
CAUTION and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
Never use a fuse with a higher am- mix with water.
perage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause ex- NOTICE
tensive damage and possibly a fire.
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may dam-
age your vehicle’s paint.
If any washer does not work, the wash-
er tank may be empty. Check the wash-
er fluid level on the level gauge. If the
washer fluid level is below “LOW” or
only slightly above the “LOW” level,
add washer fluid.
For vehicles sold in Canada—
If any washer does not work or low
windshield washer fluid level warning
light comes on, the washer tank may be
empty. Add washer fluid.

393

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Replacing light bulbs—

The following illustrations show how to The inside of the lens of exterior lights
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing such as headlights may temporarily fog up
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the in a car wash. This is not a problem
wattage ratings given in the table. because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
CAUTION and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if

To prevent burning yourself, do not there is a large drop of water on the
replace the light bulbs while they inside of the lens, or if there is water
are hot. pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

394

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type A: HB3 halogen bulbs

B: HB4 halogen bulbs
Headlights (high beam) 9005 60 A C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Headlights (high and low beams) 9006 51 B D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Double end bulbs
Front fog lights 9006 51 B
Parking and front side marker lights 168 5 D
Front turn signal lights
— 21 D
(without daytime running light system)
Front turn signal lights
4157NAK 27/8 D
(with daytime running light system)
Rear turn signal lights — 21 D
Stop/tail and rear side marker lights — 21/5 C
Back- up lights 921 16 C
License plate lights 168 5 C
High mounted stoplight 921 16 C
Interior light — 8 E
Personal lights — 5 C
Vanity lights — 3 E
Door courtesy lights — 3.8 C
Glove box light — 1.2 C
Luggage compartment light — 8 E
Running board lights — 3.8 C

395

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Headlights

Low beam
(outside)

High beam
(inside)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise 2. Unplug the connector while depress- 3. Install a new bulb and connector
to the front of the vehicle as shown. ing the lock release. into the mounting hole and turn
If the connector is tight, wiggle it. them clockwise to the front of the
vehicle.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

396

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Front fog lights

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise 2. Unplug the connector while depress- 3. Install a new bulb and connector
to the front of the vehicle as shown. ing the lock release. into the mounting hole and turn
If the connector is tight, wiggle it. them clockwise to the front of the
vehicle.

397

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail,

—Parking and front side rear side marker and back- up
marker lights —Front turn signal lights lights

Use a flathead screwdriver which is

wrapped with a cloth.

398

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

—License plate lights —High mounted stoplight

Clips

a: Rear turn signal light Use a Phillips- head screwdriver. Disconnect the clips by using a flat-
b: Stop/tail and rear side marker light bladed screwdriver which is wrapped with
c: Back- up light a cloth.

399

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

400

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

401

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Dimensions and weights

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo
Overall length mm (in.) 4800 (189.0)
weight), kg (lb.):
Overall width mm (in.) 1875 (73.8) For weight carrying hitch 2268 (5000)
1820 (71.7)∗2 or 3, 4 Also for weight distributing hitch
1800 (70.9)∗2, 3, 5 1GR- FE engine
Overall height∗1 mm (in.) 1755 (69.1)∗2, 3 Two- wheel drive models
1805 (71.1)∗2 or 3, 4, 6 3042 (6700)
1785 (70.3)∗2 or 3, 5, 6 Four- wheel drive models
1740 (68.5)∗2 or 3, 6 2906 (6400)
Wheelbase mm (in.) 2790 (109.8) 2UZ- FE engine
Two- wheel drive models
Front tread mm (in.) 1575 (62.0) 3311 (7300)
Four- wheel drive models
Rear tread mm (in.) 1575 (62.0)
3175 (7000)
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) 431 (950)∗7
kg (lb.) 476 (1050)∗8
91 (200)∗7
Luggage compartment load capacity kg (lb.)
0 (0)∗8
∗1 : Unladen vehicle
∗2 : With two- wheel drive models
∗3 : With four- wheel drive models
∗4 : With roof rails
∗5 : With rear spoiler
∗6 : With rear height control air suspension
∗7 : With 5 occupants
∗8 : With 7 occupants

402

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Engine Fuel Service specifications

Model: Fuel type: ENGINE
1GR- FE and 2UZ- FE Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87 Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
Type: (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
For improved vehicle performance, the 1GR- FE engine
1GR- FE engine Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline use of premium unleaded gasoline with
an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc- Exhaust 0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)
2UZ- FE engine
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline tane Number 96) or higher is recom- 2UZ- FE engine
mended. Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Bore and stroke, mm (in.): Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)
1GR- FE engine Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
94.0
95.0 (3.70
3.74) 87 (23.0, 19.1) Spark plug type:
2UZ- FE engine 1GR- FE engine
94.0
84.0 (3.70
3.31) DENSO K20HR- U11
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.): NGK LFR6C11
1GR- FE engine 3956 (241.4) 2UZ- FE engine
2UZ- FE engine 4664 (284.6) DENSO SK20R11
NGK IFR6A11
Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
1.1 (0.043)
ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.
qt.):
1GR- FE engine
With filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)
Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)
2UZ- FE engine
With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5)
Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

403

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in COOLING SYSTEM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): Fluid capacity (drain and refill),
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent 1GR- FE engine 9.8 (10.4, 8.6) L (qt., Imp. qt.):
to satisfy the following grade and 2UZ- FE engine 12.3 (13,0, 10.8) Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)
viscosity.
Coolant type: Fluid type:
Oil grade: Toyota Genuine ATF WS
API grade SL “Energy- Conserving” or “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
ILSAC multigrade engine oil used in your Toyota vehicle at factory Change automatic transmission fluid only
fill. In order to avoid technical problems, as necessary.
Recommended oil viscosity: only use “Toyota Super Long Life
SAE 5W- 30 Generally, it is necessary to change
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene automatic transmission fluid only if your
glycol based non- silicate, non- amine, vehicle is driven under one of the Special
non- nitrite, and non- borate coolant with Operating Conditions listed in your
long- life hybrid organic acid technology. “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
(Coolant with long- life hybrid organic “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
acid technology is a combination of low changing the automatic transmission fluid,
phosphates and organic acids.) use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF
Do not use plain water alone. JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring
Please contact your Toyota dealer for optimum transmission performance.
further details. Notice: Using automatic transmission
Outside temperature BATTERY fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” may cause deterioration in shift
Open voltage∗ at 20
C (68
F):
quality, locking up of your transmission
12.6—12.8 V Fully charged accompanied by vibration, and ultimate-
12.2—12.4 V Half charged ly damage the automatic transmission
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- 11.8—12.0 V Discharged
ther details. of your vehicle.
∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af- Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ter the key is removed with all the ther details.
lights turned off
Charging rates:
5 A max.
404

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

TRANSFER DIFFERENTIAL (2UZ- FE engine) BRAKES

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
1.4 (1.5, 1.2) Two- wheel drive models with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
Oil type: 3.05 (3.2, 2.7) with the engine running, mm (in.):
Hypoid gear oil API GL- 5 54 (2.1)
Four- wheel drive models
Recommended oil viscosity: Front 1.4 (1.5, 1.2) Pedal free play, mm (in.):
SAE 75W- 90 Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7) 1—6 (0.04—0.24)

DIFFERENTIAL (1GR- FE engine) Oil type: Pad wear limit, mm (in.):

Hypoid gear oil API GL- 5 1.0 (0.04)
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Recommended oil viscosity: Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
Two- wheel drive models 1.0 (0.04)
3.05 (3.2, 2.7) Above -18
C (0
F)
SAE 90 Parking brake adjustment when depressed
Four- wheel drive models with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):
Front 1.5 (1.6, 1.3) Below -18
C (0
F)
SAE 80W or 80W- 90 5—7 clicks
Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)
CHASSIS LUBRICATION Fluid type:
Oil type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Hypoid gear oil API GL- 5 Propeller shafts:
STEERING
Recommended oil viscosity: Spiders
Front Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI Wheel free play:
SAE 75W- 90 No.2 Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Rear Slide yokes Power steering fluid type:

Above -18
C (0
F) Molybdenum- disulfide lithium base Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
SAE 90 chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium or III
Below -18
C (0
F) base multipurpose grease, NLGI No.2
SAE 80W or 80W- 90

405

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Tires Fuses
Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire size kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi) Wheel size
Front Rear

P265/70R16 111S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16
7J∗1

16
7JJ∗2
P265/65R17 110S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17
7 1/2JJ
∗1 :
Vehicles with steel wheels
∗2 :
Vehicles with aluminum wheels
NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replac- Engine compartment
ing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Alumi-
num wheel precautions”, pages 381 through 388 in Section 7- 2. Fuses (type A)
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf): 1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse
110 (11.5, 83) 2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse
3. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high
mounted stoplight, shift lock control
system, anti- lock brake system, trac-
tion control system (two- wheel drive
models), active traction control system
(four- wheel drive models), vehicle sta-
bility control system, rear height control
air suspension, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system, trailer brake controller,
trailer lights (tail lights)

406

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

11. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection 20. ALT- S 7.5 A: Charging system
system/sequential multiport fuel injec- 21. HORN 10 A: Horns
tion system
22. A/F HEATER 15 A: A/F sensor
12. HEATER NO.2 7.5 A: Air conditioning
system 23. TRN- HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights,
emergency flashers
13. AIRSUS NO.2 10 A: Rear height con-
trol air suspension 24. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
14. SEAT HEATER 25 A: Seat heaters tion system
15. DEFOG 30 A: Back window defogger, 25. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
multiport fuel injection system/sequen- tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
tial multiport fuel injection system system
16. MIR HEATER 10 A: Outside rear view 26. DR/LCK 20 A: Power door lock system
Instrument panel mirror heater
27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter
17. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal
4. AC115V INV 15 A: AC inverter lights, wireless remote control system, 28. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system
5. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights door courtesy lights, rear seat audio 29. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
system, gauge and meter, vanity lights, tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
6. OBD 7.5 A: On- board diagnosis sys- instrument panel lights, running board system, anti- lock brake system, trac-
tem
lights, multiplex communication system tion control system (two- wheel drive
7. HEAD (LO RH) 10 A: Right- hand 18. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system, nav- models), active traction control system
headlight (low beam) (four- wheel drive models), vehicle sta-
igation system
8. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Left- hand head- bility control system, stop light, meter
19. ECU- B 10 A: Anti- lock brake system, and gauge, front passenger occupant
light (low beam) traction control system (two- wheel classification system
9. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Right- hand head- drive models), active traction control
light (high beam) system (four- wheel drive models), ve- 30. SRS 10 A: SRS airbag system
10. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Left- hand head- hicle stability control system, air condi- 31. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge
light (high beam) tioning system, multiplex communica- 32. STA NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injec-
tion system, theft deterrent system tion system/sequential multiport fuel in-
jection system
407

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

33. FR WIP- WSH 30 A: Windshield wipers 40. IG1 15 A: Anti- lock brake system, Fuses (type B)
and washer traction control system (two- wheel 46. A/PUMP 50 A: Multiport fuel injection
34. 4WD 20 A: Four- wheel drive control drive models), active traction control system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
system system (four- wheel drive models), ve- tion system
hicle stability control system, air condi-
35. D P/SEAT 30 A: Driver’s power seat tioning system, charging system, back 47. AIRSUS 50 A: Rear height control air
36. P P/SEAT 30 A: Front passenger’s window defogger, back- up lights, turn suspension
power seat signal lights, emergency flashers, seat 48. AM1 50 A: All components in “ACC”,
37. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets heaters, AC inverter, instrument panel “CIG”, “IG1”, “ECU- IG”, “FR WIP-
light control, auto anti- glare inside rear WSH”, “RR WIP”, “RR- WSH”, “4WD”,
38. RR WSH 15 A: Back window washer, view mirror and “STA” fuses
multiplex communication system
41. STA 7.5 A: No circuit 49. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con-
39. ECU- IG 10 A: Shift lock control sys- troller
tem, power windows, anti- lock brake 42. SECU/HORN 10 A: Theft deterrent sys-
system, traction control system (two- tem 50. J/B 50 A: All components in “PWR
wheel drive models), active traction 43. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate OUTLET”, “D P/SEAT”, “P P/SEAT”,
control system (four- wheel drive mod- lights, parking lights, instrument panel “POWER”, “TAIL” and “SECU/HORN”
els), vehicle stability control system, light control, multiport fuel injection fuses
electric moon roof, multiplex commu- system/sequential multiport fuel injec- 51. BATT CHG 30 A: Trailer sub battery
nication system, theft deterrent system, tion system, instrument panel lights, 52. TOWING 40 A: Trailer lights (tail
rear height control air suspension, tire meter and gauge, grove box light lights)
pressure warning system 44. ACC 7.5 A: Power outlets, outside rear 53. ABS MTR 40 A: Anti- lock brake sys-
view mirrors, audio system, navigation tem, traction control system (two- wheel
system, rear seat audio system, shift drive models), active traction control
lock control system, instrument panel system (four- wheel drive models), ve-
lights hicle stability control system
45. CIG 10 A: No circuit 54. AM2 30 A: Starter system, “IGN”,
“GAUGE”, “STA NO.2” and “SRS” fuses

408

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

55. ABS SOL 30 A: Anti- lock brake sys-

tem, traction control system (two- wheel
drive models), active traction control
system (four- wheel drive models), ve-
hicle stability control system
56. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electric
moon roof
Fuses (type C)
57. ALT 140 A: All components in “AM2”,
“ALT- S”, “DR/LCK”, “TRN- HAZ”,
“HORN”, “RADIO NO.2”, “EFI”,
“TOWING”, “ABS MTR”, “ABS SOL”,
“HEATER” and “ETCS” fuses
58. HEATER 60 A: Air conditioning system

409

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

410

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

SECTION 9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

411

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may ei-
has a defect which could cause a ther call the Auto Safety Hotline
crash or could cause injury or toll- free at 1- 800- 424- 9393 (or
death, you should immediately in- 366- 0123 in Washington, D.C.
form the National Highway Traffic area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in Department of Transportation,
addition to notifying Toyota Motor Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
Sales, U.S.A., Inc. also obtain other information about
(Toll- free: 1- 800- 331- 4331). motor vehicle safety from the Hot-
If NHTSA receives similar com- line.
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

412

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Quick index
U −4

If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . . . . . . 145

If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Tips for driving during break- in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Complete index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG
Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher.
For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline
with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recom-
mended.
See page 283 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)
Engine oil:
API grade SL “Energy- Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil is
recommended.
See page 377 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 381 through 388.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 406. Publication No. OM35860U
Part No. 01999-35860
Printed in Japan 01- 0504- 00 I
4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Where to obtain the
Periodic maintenance and tune− up helps to pre−
vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat−
Repair Manual
er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main−
tenance is required and clearly explains how to do the The repair manual for 4RUNNER may be pur−
work yourself step− by− step. chased from any Toyota dealer or the Material
Areas covered include such things as spark plug re− Distribution Center. To purchase the repair
placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil manual, please contact your Toyota dealer or call
and filter replacement. the Material Distribution Center toll− free at
1− 800− 622− 2033.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ’05 4Runner_U (L/O 0504)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU
PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

Comfortable

Easy to use

Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine